Panasonic KX-NCP500 Programming Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Panasonic Manuals
  4. PBX
  5. KX-NCP500
  6. Programming manual

Panasonic KX-NCP500 Programming Manual

Pure ip-pbx
Hide thumbs Also See for KX-NCP500:
1
2
3
Table Of Contents
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

See also: Pc Programming Manual , Programming Manual
http://www.voicesonic.com
Phone: 877-289-2829

PC Programming Manual

Pure IP-PBX
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000
Model No.
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200/KX-TDE600
Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Pure IP-PBX.
Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000: PBMPR Software File Version 5.0000 or later
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: PMMPR Software File Version 5.0000 or later
KX-TDE600: PGMPR Software File Version 5.0000 or later
Document Version: 2011-10

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for Panasonic KX-NCP500

Summary of Contents for Panasonic KX-NCP500

  • Page 1: Pc Programming Manual

    Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Pure IP-PBX. Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use. KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000: PBMPR Software File Version 5.0000 or later KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: PMMPR Software File Version 5.0000 or later KX-TDE600: PGMPR Software File Version 5.0000 or later...

  • Page 2: Safety Notices

    Introduction About this Programming Manual The PC Programming Manual is designed to serve as a system programming reference for the Panasonic Pure IP-PBX. It explains how to program this PBX using the Maintenance Console software. The PC Programming Manual is divided into the following sections: Section 1, Overview Provides an overview of programming the PBX.
  • Page 3 • Some optional hardware, software, and features are not available in some areas, or for some PBX models. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information. • The PBX supports the Virtual 16-Channel SIP CO Line Card, and configuration of the card is done using the Maintenance Console.

  • Page 4: Table Of Contents

    Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 Overview ....................9 Introduction ........................10 1.1.1 Introduction ........................10 1.1.2 Entering Characters .......................11 PC Programming ......................12 1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console ............12 1.2.2 Password Security ......................17 2 Introduction of Maintenance Console ..........19 Introduction ........................20 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes .............20 2.1.2...

  • Page 5: Pc Programming Manual

    3 [1] Configuration ..................79 [1-1] Slot ...........................80 [1-1] Slot—Summary .......................86 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key ....................92 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/ KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) ................95 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property ..................119 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command ............123 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port ...........124 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port—Connection Command ..126...
  • Page 6 Table of Contents 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type ................296 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port ................308 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command ........318 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway (KX-TDE series only) ........319 3.39 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port (KX-TDE series only) ........321 3.40 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series...

  • Page 7: Pc Programming Manual

    Table of Contents 5.14 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table ......557 5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous ........558 5.16 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group ..................561 5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List ............563 5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings ..............564 5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings ................567 5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List ..........570 5.21...
  • Page 8 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronization ....................899 14 Appendix ....................907 14.1 Revision History ......................908 14.1.1 KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 PBMPR Software File Version 1.01xx .......908 14.1.2 KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 PBMPR Software File Version 2.02xx .......908 14.1.3 KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 PBMPR Software File Version 4.1xxx .......910 14.1.4 KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 PBMPR Software File Version 4.2xxx .......911 14.1.5...

  • Page 9: Overview

    Section 1 Overview This section provides an overview of programming the PBX. Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 10: Introduction

    1.1.1 Introduction 1.1 Introduction 1.1.1 Introduction These programming instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the PBX. Each feature in the PBX has default settings that can be changed to customize the PBX to your requirements.

  • Page 11: Entering Characters

    1.1.2 Entering Characters 1.1.2 Entering Characters The characters on a white background below can be used when storing a name, message, password or other text entry data using a PC. The available characters vary according to the model of PBX. Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 12: Pc Programming

    1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console 1.2 PC Programming 1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console System programming, diagnosis and administration can be performed with a PC using the Maintenance Console. This section describes how to install and start the Maintenance Console. System Requirements Required Operating System •...
  • Page 13 PBX is reset. When not using a DHCP server: Select Disable for the DHCP Client setting. For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/ KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200, type the IP address of the MPR card in the IP Address for IPCMPR Card box. For KX-TDE600, type the IP address of the MPR card in the IP Address for IPCEMPR Card box.
  • Page 14 1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console After Quick Setup is completed, if the IP addressing information was not changed and a V-IPEXT card was installed during setup, the IP-PT registration screen is displayed. For information on registering IP-PTs to the PBX, see 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension.
  • Page 15 1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console Accessing PBX Web Manager PBX Web Manager can be enabled during the installation of the Maintenance Console. It can also be enabled in Options. Note • When starting the Maintenance Console, if there is less than 80 MB of available memory, this feature is automatically disabled.
  • Page 16 1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console PBX Web Manager Main Menu After successful login the main menu will appear where settings can be changed. Note While logged in, if there is no activity for approximately 10 minutes, PBX Web Manager will automatically disconnect.

  • Page 17: Password Security

    1.2.2 Password Security 1.2.2 Password Security To maintain system security, system passwords are required to access certain programming functions of the PBX. By giving different users access to different passwords, it is possible to control the amount of programming that each user is able to perform. The following types of system passwords are available: Password Description...
  • Page 18 1.2.2 Password Security PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 19: Introduction Of Maintenance Console

    Section 2 Introduction of Maintenance Console This section serves as reference operating instructions when using the Maintenance Console software to program the PBX. Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 20: Introduction

    2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes 2.1 Introduction 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes Every time Maintenance Console is started, a dialog box will appear. From here, you can enter any of the 2 available software modes. • Batch mode Batch mode allows you to create new system data files, and make modifications to system data files stored on your PC, without being connected to the PBX.
  • Page 21 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes Connection Settings for RS-232C Setting Values Explanation Port COMx Specify the number of the COM port assigned to the PC’s RS-232C interface. Only available COM ports are displayed. Baud Rate (bps) 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, Specify the speed of data 38400, 57600, 115200 transmission.

  • Page 22: Access Levels

    1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Specify the IP address of the PBX on the LAN. Enter the same IP address that was input in IP Address for IPCMPR Card (for KX-NCP500/ KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/ KX-TDE200)/IP Address for IPCEMPR Card (for KX-TDE600) of 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property -...
  • Page 23 2.1.2 Access Levels Access Level User Administrator For system administrators Installer For dealers and system installers The options available in each mode and access level are shown below. The access levels are abbreviated as follows: U: User; A: Administrator; I: Installer A check mark indicates that the menu option is available for that access level.
  • Page 24 2.1.2 Access Levels Tool Menu Option Batch Interactive SD memory backup ü ü ü NDSS Link Data Clear ü DXDP All OUS ü Simplified Voice Message®Delete All Recording ü ü Simplified Voice Message®Check Current Usage Call Pickup for My Group ü...
  • Page 25 2.1.2 Access Levels Menu Option Batch Interactive Screen Customize®User Level ü ü ü ü Screen Customize®Administrator Level Utility Menu Option Batch Interactive Diagnosis ü ü ü File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card) ü File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC ü...

  • Page 26: Software Interface

    2.1.3 Software Interface View Menu Option Batch Interactive Toolbar ü ü ü ü ü ü Statusbar ü ü ü ü ü ü System Menu ü ü ü ü ü ü Window Menu Option Batch Interactive Cascade ü ü ü ü ü...

  • Page 27: Main Window

    2.1.3 Software Interface Main Window The window of the Maintenance Console software is divided into several areas, as shown below: Menu Bar Provides access to file management and connection options, as well as tools and utilities used in programming the PBX. For details, see Sections 2.2 Program launcher to 2.7 Help.
  • Page 28 2.1.3 Software Interface • Tools Contains icons for backing up PBX data to the SD Memory Card, viewing extension information, and accessing Online Help. For details, see Sections 2.5.1 Tool—SD memory backup and 2.5.7 Tool —Extension List View. These menus can be positioned freely. Click and drag the title bar of a menu to move it to another position. It will automatically snap in to position above, below, to the left, or to the right of the main window if released there.

  • Page 29: Card Status

    2.1.4 Card Status Area Values Description PBX Region Code Regionxxx-xxx Displays the region code assigned to the PBX and Maintenance Console. The first 3 digits represent the region code assigned to the PBX, and the last 3 digits represent the region code assigned to the Maintenance Console.

  • Page 30: Display Options

    2.1.6 Extension Number Setting 2.1.5 Display Options The View and Window menus provide options to control the display of items within the Maintenance Console. • View – Toolbar: Displays or hides the tool bar of commonly used buttons. – Statusbar: Displays or hides the bar at the bottom of the Maintenance Console window. –...
  • Page 31 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting Available Column Specifies which fields in the original form to add extension data to. For example, if both extension numbers and names can be entered in the original form, it is possible to specify that extension name data not be transferred, by deselecting that field here.

  • Page 32: Program Launcher

    2.2.3 Program launcher—Connect—RS-232C 2.2 Program launcher 2.2.1 Program launcher—New Creates a new system data file, used to program the PBX in Batch mode. All settings are in their initial or default state. This option is only available at Installer level. To upload the file created here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX, see 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card).

  • Page 33: Program Launcher-Connect-Usb

    2.2.5 Program launcher—Connect—LAN would prefer to choose from among pre-saved profiles instead, see 2.2.7 Program launcher—Connect— Profile Setup for more details about creating profiles. To connect to the PBX by RS-232C From the program launcher, select Connect. The Login window will be displayed. Select a connection option.

  • Page 34: Program Launcher-Connect-Modem

    IP address that was input in IP Address for IPCMPR Card (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IP Address for IPCEMPR Card (for KX-TDE600) of 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/ KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600). It is also possible to search for the IP address by clicking Search.

  • Page 35: Program Launcher-Connect-Profile Setup

    2.2.7 Program launcher—Connect—Profile Setup Select the profile to use from the drop-down list. If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it. If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be entered. •...
  • Page 36 2.2.7 Program launcher—Connect—Profile Setup Button Function Save current Overwrites the previous settings with the current settings when a profile already exists. profile A confirmation message will be displayed. Save as new Saves the current settings as a new profile. A Profile Name is required. profile Delete profile When an existing profile is selected, deletes that profile.

  • Page 37: File

    2.3.4 File—Exit 2.3 File 2.3.1 File—Close Closes the system data file that is currently being modified, and returns to the program launcher. To close a system data file • From the File menu, select Close. If the system data file has not been saved, a warning message will be displayed, giving you the option to save the file.

  • Page 38: Disconnect

    2.4.1 Disconnect—Disconnect 2.4 Disconnect 2.4.1 Disconnect—Disconnect Closes the connection between the Maintenance Console and the PBX. When this option is chosen, system data is automatically backed up from the PBX to the SD memory card (see 2.5.1 Tool—SD memory backup). To disconnect From the Disconnect menu, select Disconnect.

  • Page 39: Tool

    2.5.5 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Check Current Usage 2.5 Tool 2.5.1 Tool—SD memory backup Saves system data from the PBX to the SD memory card. Backup begins as soon as this option is chosen. To back up system data • From the Tool menu, select SD memory backup. 2.5.2 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear Clears NDSS Link Data stored in the connected PBX.

  • Page 40: Tool-Call Pickup For My Group

    2.5.7 Tool—Extension List View 2.5.6 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group Allows you to automatically configure settings in 4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial and 6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial so that users can answer calls to their Call Pickup Group by pressing " 0". To activate this tool •...

  • Page 41: Tool-Import

    2.5.8 Tool—Import 2.5.8 Tool—Import Allows several types of system data files or tables to be imported. Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level. The files from which data can be imported are files that were previously saved at this or another PBX using the Export tool (see 2.5.9 Tool—Export), or comma-separated value (CSV) files.
  • Page 42 2.5.8 Tool—Import ARS - Leading Digit Data Type Import Destination Location Leading Number Leading Digit Additional Number of Digits Additional Dial Digits Routing Plan Number Route Plan Number Related programming: 10.2 [8-2] Leading Number ARS - Except Code Data Type Import Destination Location Leading Number Exception...
  • Page 43 2.5.8 Tool—Import Related programming: 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Quick Dial (Basic) Data Type Import Destination Location Dial Dial Phone Number Phone Number Related programming: 4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial Quick Dial (Expansion) Data Type Import Destination Location Dial Dial Phone Number Phone Number Related programming: 4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial...
  • Page 44 2.5.8 Tool—Import Data Type Import Destination Packet Sampling Time (G. Packet Sampling Time (G. 711Mu) 711Mu) Packet Sampling Time (G. Packet Sampling Time (G. 729A) 729A) Voice Activity Detection for G. Voice Activity Detection for G. FAX Detection Ability FAX Detection Ability DTMF DTMF Payload Type...

  • Page 45: Tool-Export

    2.5.10 Tool—Screen Customize—User Level/Administrator Level 2.5.9 Tool—Export Allows several types of system data to be exported to files. These files can be used with the Import tool (see 2.5.8 Tool—Import) to update another PBX. Except for ARS - Routing Plan, tables are exported as comma-separated value (CSV) files. Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level.

  • Page 46: Utility

    CSLC16, MCSLC16, ECSLC24, MCSLC24, CSIF, LCOT, ELCOT, T1, PRI, OPB, IP-EXT Card CT Bus diagnosis DHLC, DLC, SLC8, SLC16, MSLC16, CSLC16, CSIF, LCOT, T1, (KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/ PRI, OPB, IP-EXT KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 only) DTMF Receive test port DHLC, SLC8, SLC16, MSLC16, MCSLC16, ESLC16, EMSLC16,...
  • Page 47 2.6.1 Utility—Diagnosis To perform a card test From the Utility menu, select Diagnosis. Click on the Status cell of the card to be tested, and set it to "OUS". Click on the cell showing the card type. A new window will be displayed. Select the Card Test option.

  • Page 48: Utility-File Transfer Pc To Pbx (Sd Card)

    2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card) Select the Pair Port Test option. A new window will be displayed. The card you selected in Step 3 will be shown in the Extension Line Slot No. drop-down list. From the CO Line Slot No. drop-down list, select the slot number of the CO line card you want to test. From the CO Line Port No.
  • Page 49 Attempting to transfer any other type of file results in an error message. The names of all files that can be stored on the SD memory card are as follows: Main Program KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card...
  • Page 50 High-density CS for DECT Portable Station PCS24G CS using a CSIF card for 2.4 GHz Portable Station PDCS24G CS using a DHLC/DLC card for 2.4 GHz Portable Station System Data KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card DBSYS IPCMPR DBSYS_S IPCMPR DBSYS-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX is saved as "DBSYS_S".
  • Page 51 Corresponding Unit DLNG0–DLNG1 DVMLNG1–DVMLNG5 VPS (Display Guidance data) Activation Key Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Unit LIC00–LIC99 V-IPEXT32, V-SIPEXT32, V-IPGW16, V-SIPGW16 Default Value Data KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card DBINI IPCMPR DBIDHLC DHLC4 DBISLC SLC8 DBIDLC...
  • Page 52 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card) KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card DMINI IPCMPR DMIDHLC DHLC8 DMISLC SLC8/CSLC16 DMISLC3 MCSLC16, MCSLC24 DMIDLC DLC8/DLC16 DMIPRI DMICSINF CSIF DMILCOT LCOT8/LCOT16 DMIT1 DMIOPB3 OPB3 DMIEIO DMIIPGW2 IP-GW4 DMIIPGW3 IP-GW16 DMIPRI23 PRI23 DMISLCLC...

  • Page 53: Utility-File Transfer Pbx (Sd Card) To Pc

    Copies system data files from the SD memory card installed in the PBX to the connected PC. This option is only available at Installer level. The files that can be downloaded from the SD memory card are as follows: File Name File Type DBSYS (KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000) System Data DMSYS (KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) DGSYS (KX-TDE600) $SYSERR Error Data $SYSERR1–$SYSERR9...

  • Page 54: Utility-Sd Card File View And Load

    The name, date and time of creation, and size of files are displayed. This utility can also display information on activation key files stored in the SD memory card. The effective date, IPCMPR-ID (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR-ID (for KX-TDE600), activated feature type, number of activated features, and expiration date of activation keys are displayed on the Detail screen.

  • Page 55: Utility-Sd Card File Delete

    Allows you to delete files from the SD memory card. This option is only available at Installer level. The following essential system files cannot be deleted by this utility: KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000: PBMPR, DBSYS KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: PMMPR, DMSYS KX-TDE600: PGMPR, DGSYS To delete files from the SD memory card From the Utility menu, select SD Card File Delete.

  • Page 56: Utility-Error Log

    2.6.8 Utility—Error Log • When transferring to or from the built-in ESVM block on the MPR card, the ESVM block must be set to OUS status. To transfer OGMs to the PC From the Utility menu, select Message File Transfer PBX to PC. From the upper drop-down list, select the target MSG/ESVM card/block.
  • Page 57 • 4: Expansion Shelf 3 • YY: Slot number – KX-NCP500 (Physical slot): 00 to 05 (00: IPCMPR Card Slot/Built-in ESVM card; 01 to 05: Free Slots) – KX-NCP1000 (Physical slot): 00 to 07 (00: IPCMPR Card Slot/Built-in ESVM card; 01 to 07: Free Slots) –...

  • Page 58: Utility-T1 Signaling Bit Monitor

    2.6.11 Utility—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace To view the error log • From the Utility menu, select Error Log. 2.6.9 Utility—T1 Signaling Bit Monitor Displays reference signaling bit information for all channels of the T1 card, by monitoring sent and received A, B, C and D bits.

  • Page 59: Utility-V-Ipgw16 Protocol Trace

    2.6.13 Utility—Digital Trunk Error Report • Error Accumulation Trace: Previously accumulated error data is retrieved and displayed. This trace shows the data snapshot that is taken just before a card resets. To view trace data From the Utility menu, select ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace. From the Slot No drop-down list, select the target slot.

  • Page 60: Utility-Ip Extension Statistical Information

    2.6.14 Utility—IP Extension Statistical Information Item Description Counter of Digital Trunk Out of SYNC (#300) Digital CO line out of sync (Loss of Signal) Error Logs logged in RAI (#301) Digital CO line RAI signal reception "Minor Error" Log AIS (#302) Digital CO line Alarm Indication Signal reception Frame Failure (#300)

  • Page 61: Utility-Cs Information

    From the Utility menu, select IP Extension Statistical Information. From the Card Selection drop-down list, select the slot number for the card. "IPCMPR (VoIP-DSP)" (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/"IPCEMPR (VoIP-DSP)" (for KX-TDE600) can be selected for the DSP card when DSP Card Status is enabled. See 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600).

  • Page 62: Utility-Ps Information

    2.6.17 Utility—CS Status Monitor From the Target CSI/F Slot No. drop-down list, select the target slot. • To display information on a single card, select the slot number and name of that card. • To display information on all matching cards, select "All". From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic screen refresh.

  • Page 63: Utility-Ping

    2.6.18 Utility—Ping Item Description Slot Type (for KX-NCP500/ Slot type (shelf) of the CS that each CS is currently synchronized with. KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/ KX-TDE200)/ Shelf (for KX-TDE600) Slot Slot number of the CS that each CS is currently synchronized with. Port Port number of the CS that each CS is currently synchronized with.

  • Page 64: Utility-File Transfer Ftp To Ip Equipment-Ip-Cs/Nt400

    2.6.20 Utility—File Transfer FTP to IP Equipment—NT3xx • Click Close to return to the Ping screen. 2.6.19 Utility—File Transfer FTP to IP Equipment—IP-CS/NT400 Displays a list of files on the FTP server, and allows you to update the programs stored in IP-CSs and KX-NT400 IP-PTs.

  • Page 65: Utility-Card Software Timed Update

    2.6.21 Utility—Card Software Timed Update 2.6.21 Utility—Card Software Timed Update Updates programs in the LPR cards (optional service cards with local processors) by comparing them with files found on the SD memory card on a preset schedule, and downloading newer files to the cards. This option is only available at Installer level.

  • Page 66: Utility-System Reset-Reset By The Command

    PBX. This option is only available at Installer level. Two copies of each of the main system files can be stored on the SD memory card. The names of these files are as follows: KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 File Name Description DBSYS Main system data file.

  • Page 67: Utility-Flash Rom Id Information

    2.6.23 Utility—Flash ROM ID Information Select this if you intend to use the current system data unchanged after reset. • Click Skip to continue without backing up. Select this if you intend to replace the current system data with data that was uploaded from the PC. The second screen will be displayed.

  • Page 68: Help

    KX-T7600 series DPT with a USB Module? • Is the USB driver on the PC running? To confirm, open the Windows Device Manager, and look for "Panasonic KX-TDA USB Main Unit driver" in the USB Controllers section. If it is not present, re-install the USB driver •...
  • Page 69 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via modem. • Is the dial number of the modem correct? For more details, see 13.1 [11-1] Main. • Has a modem been installed to the PBX? •...
  • Page 70 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • Is the card installed in the appropriate slot? • Is the card installed in the correct slot, but not functioning correctly? Check the condition of the card. • Is the card itself in INS status? Set it to INS status.
  • Page 71 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) If I delete the extension number of a Portable Station, and then turn the Portable Station off and back on again, it does not function correctly. • Do not delete the extension number of the Portable Station, as this information is necessary for it to operate.
  • Page 72 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • Perform the following steps: Confirm that the Numbering Plan you will change is not currently being used by any extensions (see 2.5.7 Tool—Extension List View). If it is being used by extensions, temporarily change the extension numbers of those extensions to that of another numbering plan, or delete the extension number (see 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings and 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings).
  • Page 73 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) I cannot change a feature number. • It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items. The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by: •...
  • Page 74 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • When you click Apply, the settings are updated in the PBX, but are not yet saved to the SD memory card. If system data is not saved to the SD memory card, the PBX will restore the data that was last saved to the card in the event that the PBX is reset, or power is turned off and back on again.
  • Page 75 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) Setting Features How do I change the dialing mode of an analog CO line? • From the 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port screen, change the Dialing Mode setting of the target port to "DTMF" or "Pulse", as required. How do I set disconnect detection (CPC Detection) for an analog CO line? •...
  • Page 76 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • Class of Service feature restrictions can be set from the 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service —COS Settings screen. How do I restrict calls between 2 extensions? • Calls between extensions can be restricted from the 4.14 [2-7-3] Class of Service— Internal Call Block screen.
  • Page 77 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) How do I add an extension as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) group? • Perform the following steps: On the 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings— Member List screen, from the Incoming Call Distribution drop-down list, select the group you want to modify.
  • Page 78 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 79: [1] Configuration

    Section 3 [1] Configuration Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 80: 1-1] Slot

    3.1 [1-1] Slot 3.1 [1-1] Slot The operating characteristics associated with each service card can be programmed. Move the mouse pointer over an installed card to display the menu of options for that card. To view a summary of status and MPR versions for all cards installed in the PBX, click the Summary button (see 3.2 [1-1] Slot —Summary).
  • Page 81 Click the IP Phone Registration button. Supported Card Types KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 Card Maximum Quantity Card Programming IPCMPR: IP Convergence Main 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Processing Card IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/ 1 (fixed) KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/ KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) DHLC4: 4-Port Digital Hybrid KX-NCP500: 1 Extension Card KX-NCP1000: 1...
  • Page 82 3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Interface Card KX-NCP1000: 4 Virtual IPCS For more information on the IPCMPR card, virtual cards and other optional cards, see the following sections in the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 Installation Manual: – 1.2.1 Optional Equipment – 3.3.1 IPCMPR Card –...
  • Page 83 3.1 [1-1] Slot Card Maximum Quantity Card Programming DHLC8: 8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card MSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Message Lamp Card SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone KX-TDE100: 6 Extension Card KX-TDE200: 8 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property -...
  • Page 84 Card Maximum Quantity Card Programming IPCEMPR: IP Convergence Main 1 (fixed in Slot 11) 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Processing Card IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/ KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/ KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) DHLC8: 8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card...
  • Page 85 3.1 [1-1] Slot Card Maximum Quantity Card Programming PRI23: PRI Card (23B channels) 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type T1: T-1 Trunk Card 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type IP-GW4: 4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway (KX-TDE series only) IP-GW16: 16-Channel VoIP Gateway Card...

  • Page 86: 1-1] Slot-Summary

    For KX-TDE600: Slot 00: IPCEMPR (IP Convergence Main Processing Card: fixed) Other slots: Not stored. Value Range Card Type for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000: DHLC4: 4-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card...
  • Page 87 3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary T1: T-1 Trunk Card OPB3: Optional 3-Slot Base Card IPCMPR: MPR Card Card Type for KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: DHLC8: 8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card MSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card with Message Lamp Card SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card SLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card CSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card with Caller ID...
  • Page 88 3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway (KX-TDE series only) 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only) 3.44 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Feature Manual References None Status...
  • Page 89 3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary Maintenance Console Location 3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary Programming Manual References 3.1 [1-1] Slot Feature Manual References None IPCMPR Virtual Slot (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/ IPCEMPR Virtual Slot (for KX-TDE600) Slot Indicates the slot number (reference only). Default Not applicable. Value Range 1–8...
  • Page 90 3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary Programming Manual References 3.1 [1-1] Slot Feature Manual References None Card Type Indicates the type of virtual VoIP card installed in each slot of the virtual shelf (reference only). Default Not stored. Value Range V-IPEXT32: Virtual 32-Channel VoIP Extension Card V-SIPEXT32: Virtual 32-Channel SIP Extension Card V-IPGW16: Virtual 16-Channel VoIP Gateway Card V-SIPGW16: Virtual 16-Channel SIP CO Line Card...
  • Page 91 3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary Maintenance Console Location 3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary Programming Manual References 3.1 [1-1] Slot Feature Manual References None Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 92: 1-1] Slot-Activation Key

    IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone activation key. The remainder is the number of IP-PTs that can be used through the IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone activation key. At default, only IP softphones can be used. IPCMPR-ID (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/ IPCEMPR-ID (for KX-TDE600) Indicates the ID number of the MPR card (reference only).
  • Page 93 3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key CA Pro (user): Activation Key for CA Pro CA Supervisor (user): Activation Key for CA ICD Group Monitor Maintenance Console Location 3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None The number of activated feature by—VoIP-DSP Card Indicates the number of channels provided by the DSP card (reference only).
  • Page 94 3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None The number of activated feature by—Total Indicates the total number of channels (or CA users) provided by the DSP card and activation key files on the SD memory card (reference only).

  • Page 95: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Ipcmpr (For Kx-Ncp500/Kx-Ncp1000/Kx-Tde100/ Kx-Tde200)/Ipcempr (For Kx-Tde600)

    3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/ IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) The properties of the MPR card can be specified. LAN Setting DHCP Client Enables the DHCP Client function to assign IP address information automatically to the MPR card.
  • Page 96 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Feature Manual References None IP Address for IPCMPR Card (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/ KX-TDE200)/IP Address for IPCEMPR Card (for KX-TDE600) Specifies the IP address of the MPR card. This parameter is only available for entering values when DHCP Client is disabled.

  • Page 97: Subnet Mask

    3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) IP Address for VoIP-DSP Specifies the IP address of the DSP card. This parameter is only available for entering values when DHCP Client is disabled. Default 192.168.0.102 Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR...
  • Page 98 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Default Not stored. Value Range 0.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Speed/Duplex for Main Port Specifies the connection mode of the main port.
  • Page 99 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Default Auto Negotiation Value Range Auto Negotiation 100Mbps/full duplex 100Mbps/half duplex 10Mbps/full duplex 10Mbps/half duplex Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Programming Manual References...
  • Page 100 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Default Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 4.1.2 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Assignment DHCP Time Out Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive IP addressing information from a DHCP server.
  • Page 101 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Value Range For KX-NCP series: None, DSP4, DSP16, DSP64 For KX-TDE series: None, DSP16, DSP64 Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Programming Manual References...

  • Page 102: Ip Extension Count Of Bgm

    3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 16.1.9 SVM (Simplified Voice Message) IP Extension Count of BGM Specifies how many IP-PTs connected to the MPR card can send out BGM.
  • Page 103 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Value Range Version number Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Jitter Compensation Operation for G.711 Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for voice communications using the G.711 codec.
  • Page 104 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Jitter Compensation Operation for G.729A Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for communications using the G.729A codec.
  • Page 105 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Jitter Buffer Delay Max. for Voice Specifies the maximum size of the jitter buffer for voice communications. Default 200 ms Value Range 0–200 ms...
  • Page 106 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Jitter Buffer Adaptation Period for Voice Specifies the length of time that the jitter buffer is applied for voice communications. Default 1800 ms Value Range 1000–65530 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR...
  • Page 107 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Value Range 0–200 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Jitter Buffer Delay Init. for FAX Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer for fax communications.
  • Page 108 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None DTMF Detection Level for G.711A Specifies the level of DTMF detection for the G.711A codec.
  • Page 109 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 1 (ON) Specifies the length of time that the PBX detects the CNG signal. Default 500 ms Value Range 20–5000 ms...
  • Page 110 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) CNG Signal Fixation Detection Counter Specifies the number of times the CNG signal must be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation. Default Value Range 1–3 Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR...
  • Page 111 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Default -8 dB Value Range -13–2 dB Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None T38 FAX Transmit Level (Network to PBX) µ-Law Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax signals after being converted from T.38 protocol packets, when the...
  • Page 112 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Programming Manual References 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port Feature Manual References None DSP CODEC G.711 only (IP-GW) Specifies whether or not to only use the G.711 codec for IP CO line calls.
  • Page 113 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Programming Manual References 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension Feature Manual References None Port Number Maintenance Port Number Specifies the port number used to operate Maintenance Console via the LAN.
  • Page 114 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Feature Manual References None CTI Port Number Specifies the port number used to operate CTI via the LAN. Selecting "0" disables the 3rd Party CTI feature. Default 33333 Value Range 0–65535...

  • Page 115: Dhcp Client

    3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) LAN Status LINK for Main Port Indicates the current connection status of the main port (reference only). Default Not applicable. Value Range Disconnect, Connect Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR...
  • Page 116 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Default Disable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 4.1.2 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Assignment...
  • Page 117 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Subnet Mask Indicates the subnet mask address of the MPR card (reference only).
  • Page 118 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None IPCMPR (for KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Memory Version: (KX-TDE series only) Indicates the hardware version of the IPCMEC card when it is mounted on the MPR card (reference only).

  • Page 119: 1-1] Slot-Opb3 Card Property

    3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property 3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property The properties of the SVM (Simplified Voice Message) and OGM (Outgoing Message) features can be specified. To change the status of the ESVM card, click Command. Only the following parameters can be set. Other parameters on this screen are only applicable for the Optional Base card.
  • Page 120 3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Feature Manual References None Feature Card Type Indicates the feature type of each sub-slot (reference only). Default Current feature type Value Range In sub-slot 1–2: Reserve: No feature is installed. In sub-slot 3: ESVM2: Built-in ESVM card is installed. Maintenance Console Location 3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References...

  • Page 121: Port Status

    3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References 3.6 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command Feature Manual References None Port Number Indicates the port number of the built-in ESVM card (reference only). Default Current port number Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 122 3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Feature Manual References None SVM Feature Specifies whether or not to use the ESVM card for the SVM feature. It is possible to use the ESVM card for the SVM feature, as an MSG card (OGM feature), or both. Default Enable Value Range...

  • Page 123: 1-1] Slot-Opb3 Card Property-Card Command

    3.6 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command 3.6 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command Commands for the built-in ESVM card can be programmed. Puts the feature in service. Default Not applicable. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.6 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...

  • Page 124: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Virtual Ip Gateway Port

    3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port 3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP Gateway port. To change the status of virtual IP Gateway ports, click Command. Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only).
  • Page 125 3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: • Click the desired cell in the column. • Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command. Default Current status Value Range...

  • Page 126: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Virtual Ip Gateway Port-Connection Command

    3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port—Connection Command 3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port —Connection Command Commands for the virtual IP gateway ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References...

  • Page 127: 1-1] Slot-Shelf Property - Virtual Ip Gateway

    3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Common settings for all of the V-IPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed. Main Gatekeeper Available Specifies whether to use a gatekeeper. This setting can only be changed when all V-IPGW cards are set to OUS.
  • Page 128 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Gatekeeper Connection Checking Interval (*60s) Specifies the time between periodic checks of connection to the gatekeeper. Default Value Range 0 (disabled), 1–1440 Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 129 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Secondary Gatekeeper IP Address Specifies the IP address of the secondary gatekeeper. Default 192.168.1.4 Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255...
  • Page 130 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Feature Manual References None H.225 Port Number Specifies the port number for the H.225 protocol (call control) in an H.323 protocol suite. Default 1720 Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 131 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Default 1718 Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None QSIG Connectionless Tunneling UDP Port Number Specifies the UDP port number for connectionless tunneling between gateway devices at different locations in a QSIG network.
  • Page 132 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None RTCP Packet Sending Ability Specifies whether to enable the PBX to send RTCP packets. Default Enable Value Range...
  • Page 133 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Feature Manual References None RTP QoS Available Specifies the type of value to be stored in the ToS field of the packet. Default Value Range ToS, DSCP, HEX Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 134 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Default Normal Value Range Normal, Monetary Cost, Reliability, Throughput, Delay Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None RTP QoS-DSCP Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ. Default Value Range 0–63...
  • Page 135 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Default 48 ms Value Range OFF, 48 ms, 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway...
  • Page 136 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Feature Manual References 9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) DSP Digital Gain (Up) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path. Default 0 dB Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 137 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Default Weak Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) QSIG-CT Enables a call to be transferred to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network.
  • Page 138 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 13.1.22 Private Network Features—QSIG—CF (Call Forwarding) Trunk Property Indicates the networking type of each CO line. Default Current networking type Value Range...
  • Page 139 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Inter-digit Timer (T302-2) Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits of a dial number must be dialed. Default Value Range 1–10 s Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References...
  • Page 140 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Incoming Call Voice Activity Detection for G.711 Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G.711 codec. This feature conserves bandwidth by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network. Default Disable Value Range...
  • Page 141 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Default G.711µ Value Range None, G.711A, G.711µ, G.729A Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Voice Codec Priority 3rd Specifies the third highest priority codec type. Default G.729A Value Range...
  • Page 142 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Packet Sampling Time for G.711µ Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
  • Page 143 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Feature Manual References None FAX Detection Ability Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature. Since fax signals using a codec other than G.711 cannot be received accurately at the destination, this feature automatically switches the codec to G.711 to enable end-to-end fax signal relay over the network.
  • Page 144 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Payload Type Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones using RFC2833. Programming this parameter is only necessary if DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833). Default Value Range 96–127 Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 145 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages Specifies the redundancy count for T.30 messages when using the T.38 protocol. Default Value Range 0–7...
  • Page 146 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None T38 FAX Rate Management Method Specifies the rate management method when using the T.38 protocol. Default Transferred TCF Value Range Transferred TCF, Local TCF Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References...
  • Page 147 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway T302 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving. Default 150 ´ 100 ms Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 148 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None T305 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message. Default 150 ´...
  • Page 149 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None T309 Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to disconnect the data link, before disconnecting the call. Default 120 ´ 100 ms Value Range 0–3000 ´...
  • Page 150 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway T313 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Connect message. Default 60 ´ 100 ms Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 151 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None T319 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Suspend message. Default 0 ´...
  • Page 152 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None T3D3 Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode. Default 50 ´ 100 ms Value Range 0–3000 ´...

  • Page 153: 1-1] Slot-Shelf Property - Virtual Ip Gateway-Gk Settings

    3.10 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GK Settings 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway— GK Settings Gatekeeper registration information can be programmed. Destination Number Specifies a telephone number to register with a gatekeeper. Default Not stored. Value Range Max.

  • Page 154: 1-1] Slot-Shelf Property - Virtual Ip Gateway-Gw Settings

    3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway— GW Settings The settings related to destination gateway devices can be programmed. The following parameters can be specified for a maximum of 100 destination gateway devices. Main GW Name Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference.
  • Page 155 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings GW Group Specifies the number of the gateway group to which the gateway entry belongs. A maximum of 256 gateway groups can be created. Default None Value Range 1–256, None Maintenance Console Location 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 156 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings Value Range TCP, UDP Maintenance Console Location 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Progress Tone Send Mode Specifies whether to send call progress tones to the destination. When selecting External, call progress tones are audible at the destination.
  • Page 157 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings Maintenance Console Location 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None IP Codec Priority—1st, 2nd, 3rd Specifies the priority of the codecs to be used. For fax communications, it is necessary to specify G.711A or G.711Mu for 1st priority.
  • Page 158 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings Maintenance Console Location 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Packet Sampling Time (G.711Mu) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
  • Page 159 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings Feature Manual References None Option 2 GW Name Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference. Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 160 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings FAX Detection Ability Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature. Since fax signals using a codec other than G.711 cannot be received accurately at the destination, this feature automatically switches the codec to G.711 to enable end-to-end fax signal relay over the network.
  • Page 161 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings Default Value Range 96–127 Maintenance Console Location 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 162: 1-1] Slot-Shelf Property - Virtual Ip Gateway-Dn2Ip

    3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP 3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway— DN2IP The related settings of the address translation of telephone numbers and IP addresses can be programmed. Leading Number Specifies the leading digits in dialed numbers by which to associate calls with the appropriate destination. Default Not stored.
  • Page 163 3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP GW No./GW Group Selection Specifies the type of destination when making calls: a gateway device or a gateway group. Default GW No. Value Range GW Group, GW No. Maintenance Console Location 3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 164 3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP Value Range 1–100 Maintenance Console Location 3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 165: 1-1] Slot-Shelf Property - Virtual Ip Gateway-Hunt Pattern

    3.13 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway— Hunt Pattern The related settings of hunt patterns can be programmed. The hunt pattern determines how to route incoming calls through virtual IP CO lines to the PBX. A maximum of 32 hunt patterns can be programmed.
  • Page 166 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern Value Range For 1st: CDPG1–CDPG16 For 2nd–16th: None, CDPG1–CDPG16 Maintenance Console Location 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern Programming Manual References 3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port— Call Distribution Port Group Feature Manual References 3.1.2 Call Distribution Port Group...

  • Page 167: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Virtual Ip Extension

    The properties of the V-IPEXT card can be specified. Signaling (PTAP) UDP Port No. (Server) Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPEXT card to transmit and receive PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
  • Page 168 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension Signaling (MGCP) UDP Port No. (IP-PT) Specifies the UDP port used to transmit and receive MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data on the IP-PT side. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
  • Page 169 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (IP-PT) Specifies the UDP port used to transmit and receive RTP (Realtime Transfer Protocol) data on the IP-PT side. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port. For voice communications, an IP-PT uses 128 contiguous UDP ports, starting from the port number specified here.
  • Page 170 9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) First Resending Time (PTAP) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
  • Page 171 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension First Resending Time (MGCP) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value. Default 500 ms Value Range...
  • Page 172 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension Default 48 ms Value Range OFF, 48 ms, 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) DSP Digital Gain (Down) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.
  • Page 173 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension Maintenance Console Location 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. Default -4 dB Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 174 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension Feature Manual References 9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 175: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Virtual Ip Extension

    It is possible to de-register the IP-PT later. Preparation Open 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/ IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600), and confirm that the IP addresses of the MPR and DSP cards, subnet mask address, and default gateway address are set.
  • Page 176 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension Click OK. A dialog box will appear. Click Confirm. If the de-registration is successful, the dialog box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed". Click Close. Once the IP-PT is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-PT will update to show "None". Main Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only).
  • Page 177 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port. Default Starting at 101 Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 178 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 179 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension Maintenance Console Location 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) Current IP Address Indicates the current IP address of the IP-PT (reference only). Default Current IP address Value Range...
  • Page 180 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension Feature Manual References 9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) Option Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only). Default Current slot number Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 181 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension Default Starting at 101 Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the port.
  • Page 182 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) Headset OFF/ON Turns on or off the use of a headset with the IP-PT.
  • Page 183 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension Maintenance Console Location 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) IP Codec Priority Specifies the codec used for compression and decompression of transmitted data. Some codecs may become unavailable depending on the value set here, as follows: –...
  • Page 184 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) Packet Sampling Time (G.729A) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Default 20 ms Value Range...

  • Page 185: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Virtual Ip Extension-Connection Command

    3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension—Connection Command 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension —Connection Command Commands for the virtual IP extension ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Default Not applicable. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension—Connection Command Programming Manual References...

  • Page 186: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Virtual Sip Extension

    3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension 3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension The properties of the virtual SIP Extension card can be specified. UDP Port No. for SIP Extension Server Specifies the UDP port number used for the SIP Extension server. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
  • Page 187 3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension SIP Location Hold Time Min. Specifies the minimum length of time that the PBX holds information on the location of SIP Extensions. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value. Default 300 s Value Range...
  • Page 188 3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension Default 90 s Value Range 90–3600 s Maintenance Console Location 3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 16.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time.
  • Page 189 3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension Maintenance Console Location 3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 16.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension DSP Digital Gain (Up) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path. Default 0 dB Value Range...
  • Page 190 3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension Feature Manual References 16.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Default Weak Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Maintenance Console Location 3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension Programming Manual References None...

  • Page 191: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Virtual Sip Extension Port

    3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port Various settings can be programmed for each virtual SIP extension port. To change the status of virtual SIP extension ports, click Command. Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only).
  • Page 192 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port. Default Starting at 101 Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 193 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port Default Current status Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 194 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port Maintenance Console Location 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 16.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Packet Sampling Time (G.711/G.722) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
  • Page 195 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port Feature Manual References 16.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Voice Activity Detection for G.711 Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G.711 codec. This feature conserves bandwidth by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network.

  • Page 196: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Virtual Sip Extension Port-Connection Command

    3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port—Connection Command 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port—Connection Command Commands for the virtual SIP extension ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Default Not applicable. Value Range Not applicable.

  • Page 197: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Virtual Ipcs

    The properties of the V-IPCS card can be specified. Signaling (PTAP) UDP Port No. (Server) Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPCS card to transmit and receive PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
  • Page 198 3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS Signaling (MGCP) UDP Port No. (IP-CS) Specifies the UDP port used to transmit and receive MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data on the IP-CS side. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
  • Page 199 3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (IP-CS) Specifies the UDP port used to transmit and receive RTP (Realtime Transfer Protocol) data on the IP-CS side. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port. For voice communications, an IP-CS uses 128 contiguous UDP ports, starting from the port number specified here.
  • Page 200 Feature Manual References None First Resending Time (PTAP) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
  • Page 201 3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS First Resending Time (MGCP) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value. Default 500 ms Value Range...
  • Page 202 3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS Default 48 ms Value Range OFF, 48 ms, 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None DSP Digital Gain (Down) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path. Default 0 dB Value Range...
  • Page 203 3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS Maintenance Console Location 3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. Default 6 dB Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 204 3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS Feature Manual References None PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 205: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Virtual Ipcs

    It is possible to de-register the IP-CS later. Preparation Open 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/ IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600), and confirm that the IP addresses of the MPR and DSP cards, subnet mask address, and default gateway address are set.
  • Page 206 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS Click Confirm. If the de-registration is successful, the dialog box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed". Click Close. Once the IP-CS is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-CS will update to show "None". Main Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only).
  • Page 207 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS CS Name Specifies the CS name of the port. Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Connection Indicates the port status (reference only).

  • Page 208: Mac Address

    3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS Default None Value Range None, Registered Maintenance Console Location 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None MAC Address Indicates the MAC address of the IP-CS (reference only). Default Default MAC address Value Range...
  • Page 209 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS Maintenance Console Location 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Program Ver. Indicates the program software file version of the IP-CS (reference only). Default Current version number Value Range Version number Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 210 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS Feature Manual References None Option Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only). Default Current slot number Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None...
  • Page 211 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: •...
  • Page 212 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS Value Range G.711, G.729A Maintenance Console Location 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Packet Sampling Time (G.711) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
  • Page 213 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS Maintenance Console Location 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Voice Activity Detection for G.711 Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G.711 codec. This feature conserves bandwidth by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network.

  • Page 214: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Virtual Ipcs-Connection Command

    3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS—Connection Command 3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS— Connection Command Commands for the virtual IP-CS ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Default Not applicable. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS...

  • Page 215: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Extension Type

    3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type The property for the extension cards can be specified. SLT Pulse Dial Mode Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area. Default Normal Value Range Normal, Sweden, New Zealand Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 216 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type SLT Off Hook Guard Time Specifies the length of guard time used for off-hook signals from SLTs, to prevent the PBX mistaking them for pulse dials. Default 504 ms Value Range 8 ´ n (n=12–63) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type Programming Manual References...
  • Page 217 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type Value Range 8 ´ n (n=1–5) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None SLT Flash Detection Enables the PBX to detect the flash signal sent when an SLT user presses the hookswitch or the Flash/Recall button.
  • Page 218 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type Maintenance Console Location 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Flash Timing - Range Specifies the maximum length that a signal sent from an SLT can be for the PBX to recognize it as a hookswitch flash signal.

  • Page 219: Slt Power Supply (Kx-Tde Series Only)

    Default Current status Value Range None, Caller ID Maintenance Console Location 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type Installation Manual References For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000: None For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 3.6.6 EXT-CID Card (KX-TDA0168) For KX-TDE600: 3.8.6 EXT-CID Card (KX-TDA0168) Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 220 Hook Threshold PD A-law (KX-TDE series only) Specifies the current threshold (A-law) for switching from Power Save mode to an active state. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information. This setting is only available when an MCSLC16, MCSLC24, or ECSLC24 card is installed.
  • Page 221 Hook Threshold PD µ-law (KX-TDE series only) Specifies the current threshold (µ-law) for switching from Power Save mode to an active state. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information. This setting is only available when an MCSLC16, MCSLC24, or ECSLC24 card is installed.

  • Page 222: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Extension Port

    3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Various settings can be programmed for each extension port. To change the status of extension ports, click Command. To view total numbers of each type of extension connected, click Port Type View.
  • Page 223 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Port Indicates the port or channel number (reference only). Default Current port or channel number Value Range Port or channel number Maintenance Console Location 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 5.1.7 Extension Port Configuration...
  • Page 224 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Telephone Type Indicates the connected telephone type (reference only). The number of all connected telephones and Cell Stations can be viewed by clicking Port Type View. Default Current connected telephone type Value Range DPT (40V): DPT is connected.
  • Page 225 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Feature Manual References None Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port. Default Starting at 101 Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Programming Manual References 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Feature Manual References...
  • Page 226 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Default Value Range On: XDP enabled (The main telephone and sub telephone have different extension numbers. This is called XDP Mode.) Off: XDP disabled (The main telephone and sub telephone both have the main telephone’s extension number. This is called Parallel Mode.) Maintenance Console Location 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port...
  • Page 227 Value Range Normal: For connecting a DPT or CS DSS: For connecting a DSS Console (A maximum of 8 [with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/ KX-TDE200] or 64 [with the KX-TDE600] DSS Consoles can be connected to the PBX.) VM (DPT): For connecting a Panasonic VPS through DPT Integration PC Console: For connecting a PC Console (A maximum of 8 PC Consoles can be connected to the PBX.)
  • Page 228 Selects the unit number of the connected VPS. This setting is only available when DPT Type—Type on this screen is set to VM (DPT). Default Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1, 2 For KX-TDE600: 1–8 Maintenance Console Location 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port...
  • Page 229 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Maintenance Console Location 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group DPT Type—Air Sync Group No Assigns an Air Synchronization Group number to the CS. This setting is only available when DPT Type— Type on this screen is set to Normal.
  • Page 230 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Feature Manual References 8.1.3 Headset Operation Ringing Tone Selects the dual-tone switching pattern of the ring tone for incoming calls when Port Type on this screen is set to DPT, DPT(S-DPT), S-Hybrid, S-Hybrid(SLT), or S-Hybrid(S-DPT). This setting is not available for the KX-T7200, the KX-T7451, APTs, or SLTs.

  • Page 231: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Extension Port-Connection Command

    3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port— Connection Command Commands for the extension ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Default Not applicable. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port...

  • Page 232: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Extension Port-Port Type View

    3.26 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port Type View 3.26 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port Type View Displays the number of connected telephones and Cell Stations (CSs). This screen can only be accessed in Interactive mode. Type Indicates the types of telephone (reference only). Default Not applicable.
  • Page 233 3.26 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port Type View Feature Manual References None Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 234: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Csi/F Port (Kx-Tde Series Only)

    3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDE series only) 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDE series only) The status of the CSIF ports can be referred to, or set to INS (in-service) or OUS (out-of-service). To change the status of ports, click Command.
  • Page 235 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDE series only) Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Default Current port number Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None...
  • Page 236 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDE series only) Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Air Sync Group No Assigns an Air Synchronization Group number to the CS.

  • Page 237: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Csi/F Port-Connection Command (Kx-Tde Series Only)

    3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series only) 3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port— Connection Command (KX-TDE series only) Commands for the CSIF ports can be programmed. Puts the Cell Station (CS) in service. Default Not applicable. Value Range Not applicable.

  • Page 238: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Lco Type

    3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type The properties of the analog CO line cards can be specified. Outgoing Guard Time Specifies the length of time after a CO line is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line. Default Value Range 3–6 s...
  • Page 239 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type CO Feed Back Tone Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing CO line calls, audible tones can be heard as the dialed number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has been dialed. Default Value Range No, Yes...
  • Page 240 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Value Range 1.0 s–15.0 s Maintenance Console Location 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Pulse / DTMF Dial—DTMF Inter-digit Pause Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialed digits correctly.
  • Page 241 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Maintenance Console Location 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Low Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break Specifies the % break for a low speed pulse dial. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make (off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.
  • Page 242 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Manual References None Low Speed Pulse Dial—Make Width Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a low speed pulse dial. Low Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here. Default 40 ms Value Range...
  • Page 243 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type High Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a high speed pulse dial. High Speed Pulse Dial— Pulse % Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here. Default 32 ms Value Range...

  • Page 244: Caller Id—Caller Id Signaling

    3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Value Range Normal, Sweden, New Zealand Maintenance Console Location 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Option Card Equipment—Option 1 and Option 2 Indicates the type of the card that is installed on the LCOT card (reference only). Default Current option card type Value Range...
  • Page 245 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.3 Caller ID Caller ID—Max Receive Time Specifies the maximum number of Caller ID series that are sent from the network. Default Value Range 0 (no limit), 1, 2, 3 Maintenance Console Location 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References...
  • Page 246 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) END Detection Selects the method used to detect the end of Caller ID information. Default Length + Timer Value Range Length + Timer, Timer Maintenance Console Location 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 247 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Value Range None, 80 ´ n (n=1–15) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.3 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Detection Timer Specifies the total time required by the PBX to detect Caller ID information.

  • Page 248: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Lco Port

    3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Various settings can be programmed for each analog CO line port. To change the status of ports, click Command. Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Default Current shelf number Value Range...
  • Page 249 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Default Current port number Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: •...
  • Page 250 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Value Range DTMF, Pulse Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 4.1.3 Dial Mode Selection CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing, Incoming Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming CO line calls before disconnecting the line.
  • Page 251 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Pulse Speed Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the analog CO line. Default Value Range Low, High...
  • Page 252 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Feature Manual References None Caller ID Detection Enables the PBX to detect a Caller ID signal from the analog CO line. Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Programming Manual References 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Manual References...
  • Page 253 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Default 1.5 s Value Range 1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 13.1.4 Pause Insertion 8.1.5 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) 16.1.6 Special Carrier Access Code Flash Time...
  • Page 254 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 6.1.2 Flash/Recall/Terminate PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 255: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Lco Port-Connection Command

    3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection Command 3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Connection Command Commands for the LCO ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Default Not applicable. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port...

  • Page 256: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Pri Type

    3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type The properties of the PRI card can be specified. ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T200 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the L2 command to ISDN. Default 10 ´...
  • Page 257 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T203 Specifies the length of time to detect no communication status of L2. Default 100 ´ 100 ms Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 258 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T303 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to ISDN.
  • Page 259 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T305 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message to ISDN.
  • Page 260 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T309 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect the data link, before disconnecting the call. Default 120 ´ 100 ms Value Range 0–3000 ´...
  • Page 261 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T316 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message. Default 0 ´...
  • Page 262 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T319 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Suspend message. Default 0 ´...
  • Page 263 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T3D3 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode. Default 100 ´ 100 ms Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type Programming Manual References...
  • Page 264 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None ISDN Extension—T201 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after resending the TEI check request to ISDN. Default 10 ´...
  • Page 265 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None ISDN Extension—T301 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN. Default 0 ´ 100 ms Value Range 0–18000 ´...
  • Page 266 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN Extension—T303 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to ISDN. Default 40 ´ 100 ms Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type Programming Manual References...
  • Page 267 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None ISDN Extension—T306 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message to ISDN.
  • Page 268 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None ISDN Extension—T308 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Release message from ISDN. Default 40 ´ 100 ms Value Range 0–600 ´...
  • Page 269 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN Extension—T310 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Incoming Call Proceeding message. Default 400 ´ 100 ms Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 270 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None ISDN Extension—T320 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for packet protocol. Default 0 ´...
  • Page 271 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None ISDN Extension—T3D3 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode. Default 300 ´ 100 ms Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type Programming Manual References...

  • Page 272: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Pri Port

    3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Various settings can be programmed for each PRI port. Main Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Default Current shelf number Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References...
  • Page 273 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Default Current port number Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Port Type Selects the port type.
  • Page 274 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: • Click the desired cell in the column. • Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command. Default Current status Value Range...
  • Page 275 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Status Receive Selects what happens to a call when the Status Message from the network does not match the actual status of the call. Default Ignore Value Range Ignore: Ignore the Status Message from the network. Disconnect: Disconnect the call.
  • Page 276 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Value Range Extend Multi frame (ESF), 4-Frame Multi frame (F4), 12-Frame Multi frame (F12) Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None CO Setting CO Setting parameters are not applicable to ports assigned as Extension in Port Type.
  • Page 277 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Default Current port number Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References...
  • Page 278 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: •...
  • Page 279 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation) Ringback Tone to Outside Caller Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone. Default Enable Value Range...
  • Page 280 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port 5.4 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan Feature Manual References 9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES Networking Data Transfer Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen has been set to QSIG-Slave or QSIG-Master.

  • Page 281: Extension Setting

    3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Feature Manual References None Extension Setting Extension Setting parameters are applicable only for the PRI extension port. Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Default Current shelf number Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References...
  • Page 282 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Default Current port number Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Port Type Selects the type of the port.
  • Page 283 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: • Click the desired cell in the column. • Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command. Default Current status Value Range...

  • Page 284: Network Configuration

    3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Network Configuration Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Default Current shelf number Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Slot...
  • Page 285 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Port Type Selects the port type. Note • Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.

  • Page 286: Network Type

    3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port • Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command. Default Current status Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References...
  • Page 287 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Default Current shelf number Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only). Default Current slot number Value Range...
  • Page 288 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Port Type Selects the port type. Note • Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
  • Page 289 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 290 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private Selects the type of number that applies to outgoing CO line calls routed through public or private networks. Default Unknown Value Range...
  • Page 291 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Feature Manual References None Called Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private Selects the type of number that applies to incoming CO line calls routed through public and private networks. Default Unknown Value Range Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References...
  • Page 292 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Default Current slot number Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Default Current port number Value Range...
  • Page 293 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Value Range CO: For connecting to public network Extension: For connecting to extension QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port) QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port) Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 294 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Default CLIR, E911: Yes Other services: No Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation) 13.1.22 Private Network Features—QSIG—CF (Call Forwarding) 13.1.23 Private Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/COLP (Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation)

  • Page 295: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Pri Port-Connection Command

    3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command 3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command Commands for the PRI ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Default Not applicable. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Feature Manual References...

  • Page 296: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - T1 Type

    3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type The properties of the T1 card can be specified. Line Coding Selects the line coding type of T1 PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) used. Default B8ZS Value Range B8ZS, AMI Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type...
  • Page 297 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Default C=A, D=B Value Range C=A, D=B; C=0, D=0; C=0, D=1; C=1, D=0; C=1, D=1 Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None LIU Send Option Selects the transmitting level (Transmit Pulse Amplitude) of LIU.
  • Page 298 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None First Dial Timer (CO) Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a CO line, before sending the dialed digits to the telephone company.
  • Page 299 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Answer Detection Timer Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to recognize the answer signal. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialed digits correctly. Default 32 ms Value Range...
  • Page 300 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type DTMF Tone—DTMF Inter-digit Pause Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialed digits correctly. Default 112 ms Value Range 64 + 16 ´ n (n=0–11) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Programming Manual References...
  • Page 301 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Value Range n-42–0 (n=0–31) dB Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break Specifies the % break for pulse digits. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make (off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.
  • Page 302 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Pulse Dial—Pulse Inter-digit Pause Specifies the length of the pulse inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialed digits correctly. Default 830 ms Value Range...
  • Page 303 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Pulse Dial—Maximum BREAK Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial. Default 112 ms Value Range 8 ´ n (n=9–20) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 304 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Flash—Minimum BREAK Width (OPX) Specifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal from an SLT connected to an OPX. Default 200 ms Value Range...
  • Page 305 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Feature Manual References None Flash—Flash Signal Detection (TIE) Enables the PBX to detect a hookswitch flash signal sent from a TIE line. Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 306 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Default 800 ms Value Range 8 ´ n (n=3–191) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Caller ID—Caller ID Start Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series.
  • Page 307 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.3 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID End Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series. Default Value Range *, #, A–D...

  • Page 308: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - T1 Port

    3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Various settings can be programmed for each T1 channel. To change the status of ports, click Command. Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Default Current shelf number Value Range...
  • Page 309 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Default Current channel number Value Range Channel number Maintenance Console Location 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Connection Indicates the channel status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the channel command: •...
  • Page 310 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation) CO Dial Mode Selects the type of signal used to dial out to a CO line.
  • Page 311 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Maintenance Console Location 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 17.1.1 T1 Line Service Trunk Property Selects the CO line property of the TIE channel. Default Public Value Range Public: Use the DIL/DID method to distribute incoming CO line calls.
  • Page 312 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.23 CPC (Calling Party Control) Signal Detection CPC Signal Detection (LCO/GCO)—Outgoing, Incoming Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming CO line calls before disconnecting the line.
  • Page 313 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Feature Manual References None CO Pulse Speed Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the T1 channel. Default 10 pulse/s Value Range 10 pulse/s, 20 pulse/s Maintenance Console Location 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 314 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Default Wink Value Range Immediate: Sends the dialed digits to the CO line when the First Dial Timer expires. Wink: Sends the dialed digits to the CO line when the wink signal is received. Maintenance Console Location 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Programming Manual References...
  • Page 315 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Maintenance Console Location 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Ringback Tone to Outside Caller Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone. This setting is only available when Channel Type on this screen is set to DID.
  • Page 316 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Feature Manual References None Pause Time Specifies the length of a pause. Default 1.5 s Value Range 1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s Maintenance Console Location 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 317 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Disconnect Time Specifies the length of time after a CO line is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line. Default 1.5 s Value Range 0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s Maintenance Console Location 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Programming Manual References...

  • Page 318: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - T1 Port-Connection Command

    3.37 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command Commands for the T1 channels can be programmed. Puts the channel in service. Default Not applicable. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Feature Manual References...

  • Page 319: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Ip Gateway (Kx-Tde Series Only)

    3.38 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway (KX-TDE series only) 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway (KX-TDE series only) The properties of the VoIP Gateway card can be specified. En-bloc Dialing setting Selects the call dialing mode. Default Overlap Value Range En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialed digits at once after the extension user completes dialing.
  • Page 320 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway (KX-TDE series only) Feature Manual References 13.1.24 Private Network Features—QSIG—CT (Call Transfer) QSIG-CF Enables a call to be forwarded to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network. When using the Centralized VM feature, set this to "No". Default Value Range Yes, No...

  • Page 321: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Ip-Gw Port (Kx-Tde Series Only)

    3.39 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port (KX-TDE series only) 3.39 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port (KX-TDE series only) Status of the IP-GW ports can be referred to, or set to INS (in service) or OUS (out of service). To change the status of ports, click Command.
  • Page 322 3.39 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port (KX-TDE series only) Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Default Current port number Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.39 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None...

  • Page 323: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Ip-Gw Port-Connection Command (Kx-Tde Series Only)

    3.40 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series only) 3.40 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port— Connection Command (KX-TDE series only) Commands for the IP-GW ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Default Not applicable. Value Range Not applicable.

  • Page 324: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Ip Extension (Kx-Tde Series Only)

    3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only) 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only) The properties of the VoIP Extension card can be specified. To adjust settings related to IP-PT network data transmission, click Common Settings (see 3.42 [1-1] Slot— Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings (KX-TDE series only)).
  • Page 325 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only) Gateway Address [Common Settings] Displays the default gateway address of the network for IP-PTs (reference only). To change the value displayed here, click Common Setting, and set the desired value for Gateway Address.
  • Page 326 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only) Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Default 48 ms Value Range OFF, 48 ms, 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 327 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only) Maintenance Console Location 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. Default -4 dB Value Range...
  • Page 328 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only) Feature Manual References 9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 329: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Ip Extension-Common Settings (Kx-Tde Series Only)

    3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings (KX-TDE series only) 3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension— Common Settings (KX-TDE series only) IP-PT network data transmission settings can be programmed. To activate any changes made to settings on this screen, it is necessary to set all installed IP-EXT cards to OUS, then back to INS. Gateway Address Specifies the default gateway address of the network for IP-PTs.
  • Page 330 3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings (KX-TDE series only) Feature Manual References 9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (IP-PT) Specifies the UDP port used to transmit and receive RTP (Realtime Transfer Protocol) data on the IP-PT side. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.

  • Page 331: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Ip-Extension Port (Kx-Tde Series Only)

    3.43 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only) 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only) Various settings can be programmed for each IP extension port. To change the status of extension ports, click Command. IP-PT Registration and De-registration An IP-PT must be registered to the PBX by programming both the PBX and IP-PT before it can be used.
  • Page 332 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only) Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click Next. A dialog box will appear. Click OK. A dialog box will appear. Click Confirm. If the de-registration is successful, the dialog box will show "Forced de-registration succeed!".
  • Page 333 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only) Feature Manual References 9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Default Current port number Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 334 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only) • Click the desired cell in the column. • Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command. Default Current status Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service.
  • Page 335 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only) Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) Headset OFF/ON Turns on or off the use of a headset with the IP-PT.
  • Page 336 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only) Maintenance Console Location 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) IP Codec Specifies the codec used for compression and decompression of transmitted data. Default G.711 Value Range...
  • Page 337 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only) Feature Manual References 9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 338: 1-1] Slot-Opb3 Card Property

    3.44 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property 3.44 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property The properties of the Optional Base card can be specified. To change the status of slots on the OPB card, click Command. The properties of the SVM (Simplified Voice Message) and OGM (Outgoing Message) features can also be specified on this screen.
  • Page 339 ECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card ESVM4: 4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card Maintenance Console Location 3.44 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Installation Manual References For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000: 1.2.1 Optional Equipment For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1.2.1 Optional Equipment For KX-TDE600: 1.2.1 Optional Equipment...
  • Page 340 3.44 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References 3.46 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup Feature Manual References None Status Indicates the status of the option card in each slot (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the card command: •...
  • Page 341 3.44 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Port Status Indicates the port status of the mounted option card (reference only). Default Current port status Value Range INS: The card is in service. OUS: The card is out of service. Fault: The card is pulled out from the sub-slot, or is not communicating with the PBX.
  • Page 342 3.44 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Feature Manual References 5.1.9 External Sensor Input Signal Detection Reopening Time Specifies the length of time after the sensor has been triggered during which any further input from the sensor will be ignored. Default 10 s Value Range 10 ´...
  • Page 343 3.44 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property MSG Feature Specifies whether or not to use the ESVM card as an MSG card (OGM feature). It is possible to use the ESVM card for the SVM feature, as an MSG card (OGM feature), or both. Default Enable Value Range...

  • Page 344: 1-1] Slot-Opb3 Card Property-Card Command

    3.45 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command 3.45 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command Commands for the service cards installed on the OPB card can be programmed. Puts the card in service. Default Not applicable. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.45 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 345 ECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card ESVM4: 4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card Maintenance Console Location 3.45 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command Installation Manual References For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000: 1.2.1 Optional Equipment For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1.2.1 Optional Equipment For KX-TDE600: 1.2.1 Optional Equipment...
  • Page 346 3.45 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command Feature Manual References None PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 347: 1-1] Slot-Opb3 Option Card Setup

    ECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card ESVM4: 4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card Maintenance Console Location 3.46 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup Installation Manual References For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000: 1.2.1 Optional Equipment For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1.2.1 Optional Equipment For KX-TDE600: 1.2.1 Optional Equipment Programming Manual References 3.44 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property...
  • Page 348 3.46 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup Maintenance Console Location 3.46 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup Programming Manual References 3.1 [1-1] Slot 3.44 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Feature Manual References None Card Inserted Displays the type of option card currently installed to each slot of the OPB3 card. Default Not stored.

  • Page 349: 1-2] Portable Station

    3.47 [1-2] Portable Station 3.47 [1-2] Portable Station Various portable station (PS) settings can be programmed. A maximum of 64 (with the KX-NCP500/ KX-NCP1000), 128 (with the KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200), or 512 (with the KX-TDE600) PSs can be registered. Information on 32 PSs is displayed at a time. To display other PSs, click the applicable tab.
  • Page 350 Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 13.1.27 PS (Portable Station) Index Indicates the PS number (reference only). Default Not applicable. Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000: 1–64 For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–128 For KX-TDE600: 1–512 Maintenance Console Location 3.47 [1-2] Portable Station Programming Manual References...
  • Page 351 3.47 [1-2] Portable Station Extension No. Specifies the extension number of the PS. In Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, the PS can be used as a sub telephone with a wired main telephone (PT/SLT), and two of them will share one extension number of the main telephone. However, note that the PS extension number specified here will not be altered by the extension number of the main telephone even if the PS is in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode.
  • Page 352 3.47 [1-2] Portable Station Default None Value Range None, Registered Maintenance Console Location 3.47 [1-2] Portable Station Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 13.1.27 PS (Portable Station) PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 353: 1-3] Option

    3.48 [1-3] Option 3.48 [1-3] Option System options can be programmed. It is possible to clear the master CS information (Master CS Port and Radio System ID) by following the procedure below in batch mode: Click Clear Master CS. Click Yes. To abort the procedure, click No. If the system data is downloaded to the PBX after the master CS information has been cleared, it is necessary to register all PSs again in the interactive mode.
  • Page 354 3.48 [1-3] Option Programming Manual References 6.17 [4-2-6] Portable Station—Single CO Appearance Feature Manual References 13.1.28 PS—CO Status Display (KX-WT125/KX-WT126 only) New Card Installation—Card Status for any Card Selects the initial status of cards after installation. Default In Service Value Range In Service, Out of Service Maintenance Console Location 3.48 [1-3] Option...
  • Page 355 3.48 [1-3] Option New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card Specifies whether a PRI23 card is automatically set to ISDN Standard mode or T1-LCOT mode when it is installed for the first time. Default ISDN Standard mode Value Range ISDN Standard mode: The CCBS, CF, CT, and Centralized VM features are supported.

  • Page 356: 1-4] Clock Priority

    3.49 [1-4] Clock Priority 3.49 [1-4] Clock Priority Slot Number (KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200), Shelf-Slot Number (KX-TDE600) Selects and prioritizes slot numbers for the PRI and T1 cards that are used to forward a clock pulse from an external source to the PBX.

  • Page 357: [2] System

    Section 4 [2] System Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 358: 2-1-1] Date & Time-Date & Time Settings

    4.1 [2-1-1] Date & Time—Date & Time Settings 4.1 [2-1-1] Date & Time—Date & Time Settings The date and time of the PBX can be programmed. The date and time will be shown on the display of extensions (e.g., PT, PS). This option is only available in Interactive mode.

  • Page 359: 2-1-2] Date & Time-Sntp / Daylight Saving

    4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving 4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Automatic clock adjustment and Summer time (daylight saving time) settings of the PBX can be programmed. Automatic clock adjustment can be performed using one of two methods, ISDN & Caller ID or SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol).
  • Page 360 4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving SNTP—SNTP Server—Port Number Specifies the port number used for communication with an SNTP server. Default Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 1.1.7 Automatic Time Adjustment...
  • Page 361 4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Maintenance Console Location 4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 1.1.7 Automatic Time Adjustment Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 362: 2-1-2] Date & Time-Sntp / Daylight Saving-Daylight Saving

    4.3 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving 4.3 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving— Daylight Saving Summer time can be programmed. Summer time sets the clock one hour forward at 2:00 AM on the start date, and one hour back at 2:00 AM on the end date. The start and end dates of a maximum of 20 different summer times can be programmed.
  • Page 363 4.3 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving Feature Manual References 1.1.7 Automatic Time Adjustment End Date—Year, Month, Day Specifies the end date of daylight savings time. Default Year: 2010 (For Daylight Saving Time number 1. The year advances by one for the subsequent Daylight Saving Times.) Month: 11 Day: Day of the first Sunday of the month...

  • Page 364: 2-2] Operator & Bgm

    4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM 4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM Settings related to the PBX operator and audio sources can be specified. PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the extension number or floating extension number of incoming call distribution group to be designated as the PBX operator in each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
  • Page 365 4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM Feature Manual References 11.1.4 Music on Hold 2.1.1 BGM (Background Music) BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM2–7 (for KX-NCP series)/Music Source of BGM3–8 (for KX-TDE series)—OGM No. Selects the OGM number and name of the audio source of BGM. Note To use this feature it is necessary to disable the SVM Feature setting for the corresponding card.

  • Page 366: Bgm And Music On Hold—Music On Hold

    4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM 3.44 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property— MSG Feature Feature Manual References 2.1.1 BGM (Background Music) 11.1.4 Music on Hold 12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message) BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold Selects the audio source for Music on Hold. Default For KX-NCP series: For KX-TDE series:...
  • Page 367 4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.10 Call Transfer Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 368: 2-3] Timers & Counters

    4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Various system timers and counters can be programmed. Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter Specifies the number of times Automatic Redial is attempted before being canceled. Default Value Range 0-15...
  • Page 369 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Automatic Redial—Analog CO Mute / Busy Detection Timer Specifies the length of time before the PBX stops muting the caller’s voice and cancels busy tone detection when Automatic Redial to analog CO line is performed. Default Value Range 0–15 s...
  • Page 370 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Value Range 1–250 s Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 1.1.5 Automatic Extension Release Dial—Extension Inter-digit Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits must be dialed before the PBX sends a reorder tone.

  • Page 371: Dial—Analog Co Call Duration Start

    4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Dial—Analog CO Inter-digit Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits of a telephone number must be sent to an analog CO line.
  • Page 372 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 16.1.4 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the length of time until an unanswered CO line call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each time mode.

  • Page 373: Recall—Transfer Recall

    4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Feature Manual References 3.1.4 Call Hold Recall—Transfer Recall Specifies the length of time that a transferred call waits to be answered, before being redirected to the Transfer Recall destination assigned to the original transferring extension. Default 60 s Value Range...

  • Page 374: Tone Length—Busy Tone / Dnd Tone

    4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Recall—Disconnect after Recall Specifies the length of time after an extension with a CO line call on hold receives a Hold Recall tone that the held call is disconnected. Default Value Range 60 ´ n (n = 1–30) s Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers &...
  • Page 375 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Default 10 s Value Range 1–15 s Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 1.1.5 Automatic Extension Release Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is heard from the built-in speaker of a PT in hands-free mode. The PT will return to idle status when this timer expires.
  • Page 376 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Value Range 0–30 s Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Manual References 4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access) DISA—Mute & OGM Start Timer after answering Specifies the length of time until the caller hears an OGM after reaching the DISA line.
  • Page 377 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message 8.6 [6-6] Tenant— Operator (Extension Number) Feature Manual References 4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access) DISA—2nd Dial Timer for AA Specifies the length of time in which the caller must dial the second digit before the DISA AA Service activates. Default Value Range 0–5 s...
  • Page 378 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Manual References 9.1.11 Intercept Routing 4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access) DISA—Disconnect Timer after Intercept Specifies the length of time that an intercepted DISA call rings at the intercept routing destination before being disconnected.
  • Page 379 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Time Specifies the length of time that a CO-to-CO line call on a DISA line is prolonged each time that the caller prolongs the call. (Selecting "0" prevents the caller from prolonging the CO-to-CO line call.) Default Value Range 60 ´...
  • Page 380 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Value Range 1–15 s Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Manual References 4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access) Doorphone—Call Ring Duration Specifies the length of time that a call from a doorphone rings until the call is canceled when there is no answer. Default 30 s Value Range...

  • Page 381: Timed Reminder—Repeat Counter

    4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Feature Manual References 4.1.12 Doorphone Call Doorphone—Open Duration Specifies the length of time that a door stays unlocked after being opened from an extension. Default Value Range 2–7 s Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers &...

  • Page 382: Timed Reminder—Interval Time

    4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Timed Reminder—Interval Time Specifies the length of time between the repeated alarms. Default 30 s Value Range 10 ´ n (n=1–120) s Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 17.1.4 Timed Reminder Timed Reminder—Alarm Ringing Duration Specifies the length of time that an alarm rings.

  • Page 383: Unattended Conference—Warning Tone Start Timer

    4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.18 Conference Unattended Conference—Warning Tone Start Timer Specifies the length of time until the parties involved in an Unattended Conference receive a warning tone after the conference originator receives the Unattended Conference Recall tone but does not return to the conference.

  • Page 384: Caller Id—Visual Caller Id Display

    4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.18 Conference Miscellaneous Caller ID—Waiting to receive Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive Caller ID from an analog CO line. If the Caller ID is received through an analog CO line card on which no Caller ID card is mounted or through a port to which Caller ID Detection is disabled, this timer is not applicable.
  • Page 385 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.3 Caller ID 3.1.11 CALL WAITING FEATURES 3.1.12 Call Waiting Tone Extension PIN—Lock Counter Specifies the number of successive incorrect PIN entries allowed before the extension PIN is locked. A locked extension PIN can not be used until reset from the extension assigned as manager.
  • Page 386 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Feature Manual References 5.1.9 External Sensor Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—DID Specifies the length of time between digits when receiving a DID number from a public network. The call will be redirected to a PBX operator when this timer expires. Default 10 s Value Range...
  • Page 387 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters PT Display—PT Last Display Duration in Idle Mode Specifies the length of time that the current information remains on the display after the extension returns to idle status. Default Value Range 1–15 s Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers &...
  • Page 388 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Value Range 1–30 s Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group During Conversation—DTMF Signal Length Specifies the length of time that a DTMF signal is sent when a number is dialed from a PT or PS during a conversation.
  • Page 389 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None During Conversation—Pause Signal Time Specifies the length of the pause inserted when the PAUSE button is pressed during a conversation. Default 1.5 s Value Range...

  • Page 390: Svm—Recording Time

    4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Feature Manual References 13.1.19 Private Network Features—PS Roaming by Network ICD Group SVM—Recording Time Specifies the maximum length of a message recorded by the SVM feature. Default 120 s Value Range 1–600 s Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers &...

  • Page 391: Conference Group Call—Ring Duration

    4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Conference Group Call—Ring Duration Specifies the length of time that a conference group call will ring. The conference group call will be established with members who answer within this time. If no members answer the call before this timer expires, the call is canceled.

  • Page 392: 2-4] Week Table

    4.6 [2-4] Week Table 4.6 [2-4] Week Table A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation depending on the time of day. The time mode can be switched either automatically or manually. Select the desired switching mode from the Time Service Switching Mode option.

  • Page 393: 2-4] Week Table-Time Setting

    4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting 4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting The start times of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the selected Time Table, as well as the start and end times of up to 3 break periods. 1.
  • Page 394 4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting Feature Manual References 17.1.3 Tenant Service 17.1.5 Time Service 2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—Setting Enables the setting of the start time for each break period. Default Disable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 395 4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting 2. Break—Break 1–3 End—Hour, Minute Specifies the start time for each break period. Times can only be set when 2. Break—Break 1–3 Start— Setting is set to Enable. Default 00:00 Value Range 00:01–23:59 Maintenance Console Location 4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting Programming Manual References None...

  • Page 396: 2-5] Holiday Table

    4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table 4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation during holidays. Select the desired time mode from the Holiday Mode list. The start and end dates of a maximum of 24 different holidays can be programmed. Holiday Table—Setting Enables the setting of the holiday.
  • Page 397 4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table Holiday Table—Start Date—Day Specifies the day of the holiday start date. Default Value Range 1–31 Maintenance Console Location 4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 17.1.5 Time Service Holiday Table—End Date—Month Specifies the month of the holiday end date. Default Value Range 1–12...
  • Page 398 4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table Maintenance Console Location 4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 17.1.5 Time Service PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 399: 2-6-1] Numbering Plan-Main

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Details of the extension numbering schemes, feature access numbers and numbers to access other PBXs in a network can be programmed here. For more information on flexible numbering, see "6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature Manual.

  • Page 400: Idle Line Access (Local Access)

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Value Range None: 0 digit X: 1 digit XX: 2 digits Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering Features Feature numbers to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available while hearing a dial tone.

  • Page 401: Trunk Group Access

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Default Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 5.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority Feature Manual References 3.1.16 CO Line Access Trunk Group Access Specifies the feature number used to make a CO line call using an idle CO line from a certain trunk group.

  • Page 402: System Speed Dialing / Personal Speed Dialing

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table Feature Manual References 13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES Redial Specifies the feature number used to redial the last number dialed. Default Value Range Max.

  • Page 403: Personal Speed Dialing - Programming

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Feature Manual References 16.1.7 Speed Dialing, Personal 16.1.8 Speed Dialing, System Personal Speed Dialing - Programming Specifies the feature number used to program Personal Speed Dialing numbers at an extension. Default Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References...
  • Page 404 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Default Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 5.9 [3-4] Paging Group Feature Manual References 13.1.1 Paging External BGM On / Off Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to turn on or off the external BGM.

  • Page 405: Single Co Line Access

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Manager Feature Manual References 12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message) Single CO Line Access Specifies the feature number used to make a CO line call using a certain CO line. Default Value Range Max.

  • Page 406: Tafas Answer

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Feature Manual References 13.1.2 Paralleled Telephone Group Call Pickup Specifies the feature number used to answer a call ringing at a certain call pickup group. Default Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References...
  • Page 407 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Default Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 7.2 [5-2] External Pager Feature Manual References 17.1.2 TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station) Group Paging Answer Specifies the feature number used to answer a page to a paging group.
  • Page 408 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 1.1.4 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on) User Remote Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code Specifies the feature number used to change the COS of an extension temporarily, and also change the feature settings (for example, FWD, DND) of an extension from another extension or through DISA.
  • Page 409 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Accept Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set by PS Feature Manual References 20.1.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Account Code Entry Specifies the feature number used to enter an Account Code. Default Value Range Max.
  • Page 410 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Call Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Holding Extension Number Specifies the feature number used to retrieve a held call from a different extension by specifying a holding extension number. Default Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References...
  • Page 411 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.4 Call Hold Door Open Specifies the feature number used to open a door. Default Value Range Max.

  • Page 412: Sip Refer (Blind)

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 7.6 [5-4] External Relay Feature Manual References 5.1.8 External Relay External Feature Access Specifies the feature number used to access the features of a host PBX or the telephone company. Default Value Range Max.
  • Page 413 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main COLR Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel COLR, which suppresses the presentation of the called party’s number to the caller. Default *7*0 Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References...

  • Page 414: Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Switch CLIP of CO Line / Extension Specifies the feature number used to send either the CLIP number of the CO line in use (subscriber’s number) or the extension to the network. Default *7*2 Value Range Max.
  • Page 415 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Default Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 11.1.3 Message Waiting FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming CO line and intercom calls.
  • Page 416 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Manual References 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from Extension Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming intercom calls. Default *712 Value Range...
  • Page 417 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Manual References 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming CO line and intercom calls to an incoming call distribution group.
  • Page 418 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from Extension Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming intercom calls to an incoming call distribution group. Default *716 Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References...
  • Page 419 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 5.9 [3-4] Paging Group Feature Manual References 13.1.1 Paging Walking Extension Specifies the feature number used to use the same extension settings at a new extension. Default *727 Value Range...

  • Page 420: Manual Call Waiting For Extension Call

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 4.1.1 Data Line Security Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call Specifies the feature number used to set or change the method of receiving a Call Waiting notification from an extension.

  • Page 421: Not Ready (Manual Wrap-Up) Mode On / Off

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Executive Override Deny Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Executive Busy Override (i.e., preventing other extensions from joining your conversation). Default *733 Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References...

  • Page 422: Incoming Call Queue Monitor

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Manual References 9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out Incoming Call Queue Monitor Specifies the feature number, available only for extensions assigned as a supervisor, used to monitor the status of an incoming call distribution group with the extension display.
  • Page 423 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start Feature Manual References 8.1.6 Hot Line Absent Message Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the display of an Absent Message.

  • Page 424: Remote Timed Reminder (Remote Wakeup Call)

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Feature Manual References 2.1.1 BGM (Background Music) Remote Timed Reminder (Remote Wakeup Call) Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Timed Reminder remotely (Wake-up Call). Default *76* Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References...

  • Page 425: Time Service (Day / Lunch / Break / Night) Switch

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Default *761 Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 8.2 [6-2] Hotel—Main— SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8 Feature Manual References 13.1.13 Printing Message Extension Dial Lock Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to lock or unlock an extension to make certain CO line calls and change...
  • Page 426 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Time Service Switch 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Manager Feature Manual References 17.1.5 Time Service Remote Extension Dial Lock Off Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to unlock other extensions using the Extension Dial Lock feature.
  • Page 427 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Manager Feature Manual References 5.1.4 Extension Dial Lock Extension Feature Clear Specifies the feature number used to reset certain features of an extension to the default values. Default *790 Value Range...
  • Page 428 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Dial Information (CTI) Specifies the feature number used to send dial information to the CTI feature instead of the PBX. Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None...

  • Page 429: Simplified Voice Message Access

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table Feature Manual References 13.1.17 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection) 6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering Simplified Voice Message Access Specifies the feature number used to access the SVM feature to record, listen to and delete messages.
  • Page 430 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table— Leading Number Feature Manual References 13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 431: 2-6-2] Numbering Plan-Quick Dial

    4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial 4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial Quick Dialing numbers are used to call extensions or outside parties, or access certain features without having to dial their full numbers. It is possible to register Quick Dialing numbers that overlap with other registered numbers (refer to "Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls to Public CO Lines"...
  • Page 432 4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 13.1.26 Private Network Features—VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) 6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering 14.1.1 Quick Dialing Phone Number Specifies the number to be dialed when the corresponding Quick Dialing number is used. Default Not stored.

  • Page 433: 2-6-3] Numbering Plan-B/Na Dnd Call Feature

    4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature 4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature Feature numbers used to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available while hearing a busy, DND, or ringback tone. Each feature must have a unique feature number. For more information on flexible numbering, see "6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering"...
  • Page 434 4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny Feature Manual References 5.1.3 Executive Busy Override Alternate Calling - Ring / Voice Specifies the feature number used to allow a caller to change the called extension’s preset call receiving method to ring tone or voice.
  • Page 435 4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature Call Monitor Specifies the feature number used to listen to a busy extension’s conversation. Default Value Range 1 digit (0–9, *, or #) Maintenance Console Location 4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature Programming Manual References 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive—...
  • Page 436 4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature Default Value Range 1 digit (0–9, *, or #) Maintenance Console Location 4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2—...

  • Page 437: 2-7-1] Class Of Service-Cos Settings

    4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Each extension, doorphone port, incoming call distribution group, and trunk group is assigned a Class of Service (COS). Certain features can be programmed to behave differently depending on the COS. A maximum of 64 COS levels can be programmed.

  • Page 438: Trs Level For System Speed Dialing

    4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 4.6 [2-4] Week Table 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main— 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone—...

  • Page 439: Co & Smdr

    4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Default Value Range 1: Allows all CO line calls 2–6: Restricts CO line calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables 7: Restricts all CO line calls Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—...

  • Page 440: Transfer To Co

    4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Default Disable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 2— Extension - CO Call Limitation—For Incoming Call 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—...

  • Page 441: Outgoing Co Call Printout (Smdr)

    4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Manual References 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) Account Code Mode...
  • Page 442 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— 13.1 [11-1] Main Feature Manual References 16.1.4 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) Assistant COS Name Specifies the name of the COS.

  • Page 443: Dnd Override

    4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console Feature Manual References 3.1.8 Call Pickup DND Override Enables making a call to an extension in DND mode by entering the feature number.

  • Page 444: Transfer To Busy Extension W/O Bss Operation

    4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Manual References 12.1.3 OHCA (Off-hook Call Announcement) 20.1.4 Whisper OHCA Transfer to busy Extension w/o BSS Operation Enables a transferred call to be queued when the transfer destination is busy. Default Disable Value Range...
  • Page 445 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Manual References 8.1.1 Hands-free Answerback Executive COS Name Specifies the name of the COS. Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.22 COS (Class of Service)
  • Page 446 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Executive Busy Override Enables interrupting an existing call to establish a three-party conference call. Default Disable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—...
  • Page 447 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.22 COS (Class of Service) Group Forward Set Enables setting call forwarding for calls to an incoming call distribution group. Default Enable-Group Value Range...

  • Page 448: Time Service Switch

    4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Value Range Disable: A PT user cannot perform any programming. PROG Only: A PT user can perform only personal programming. PROG **/*#: A PT user can perform both personal and system programming. Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—...
  • Page 449 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 4.6 [2-4] Week Table 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Manual References 17.1.5 Time Service PDN/SDN An SDN button allows a PT user to see the current status of the corresponding PDN extension, and to pick up or transfer calls to that extension easily.
  • Page 450 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension Making call by COS of SDN key’s owner Selects whether an extension that uses an SDN button to make calls is given the COS of the SDN button’s registered (owner) extension.

  • Page 451: Door Unlock

    4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Manual References 13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension Optional Device & Other Extensions COS Name Specifies the name of the COS. Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 452 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings External Relay Access Enables access to external relays. Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 7.6 [5-4] External Relay Feature Manual References 5.1.8 External Relay Accept the Call from DISA Enables reception of calls from DISA.
  • Page 453 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Value Range Allow, Deny Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Manual References 20.1.1 Walking COS Accept Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set by PS Allows Wireless XDP Parallel Mode to be set by a PS.
  • Page 454 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.22 COS (Class of Service) CA Chat Enables the chat feature when using Communication Assistant (CA) Client. Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable...
  • Page 455 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Manual References 3.1.1 CA (Communication Assistant) Miscellaneous COS Name Specifies the name of the COS. Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.22 COS (Class of Service)

  • Page 456: 2-7-2] Class Of Service-External Call Block

    Each COS can have different trunk groups available for making CO line calls, depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night). Select the desired time mode from the list. Outgoing Trunk Group 1–64 (KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/ KX-TDE200) or 1–96 (KX-TDE600) Specifies the available trunk groups.

  • Page 457: 2-7-3] Class Of Service-Internal Call Block

    4.14 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block 4.14 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block Internal Call Block determines the restrictions placed on making intercom calls. The extensions, incoming call distribution groups, and doorphones belonging to a certain COS can be programmed to not receive intercom calls from those belonging to a certain COS.

  • Page 458: 2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns-Call From Co

    4.15 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO 4.15 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming CO line calls depending on the trunk group that the calls are received on. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.

  • Page 459: 2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns-Call From Doorphone

    4.16 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone 4.16 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming doorphone calls depending on the doorphone port that the calls originate from. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.

  • Page 460: 2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns-Call From Others

    4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others 4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming intercom calls and ringing triggered by certain PBX features (Timed Reminder, Call Back, and Live Call Screening). A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
  • Page 461 4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Call Back—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8 Specifies the ring tone pattern for callback ringing by Automatic Callback Busy. Default S-Double Value Range Single, Double, Triple, S-Double Maintenance Console Location 4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—...
  • Page 462 4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Value Range Single, Double, Triple Maintenance Console Location 4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table Feature Manual References 5.1.9 External Sensor...

  • Page 463: 2-9] System Options

    4.18 [2-9] System Options 4.18 [2-9] System Options Various system settings can be programmed. Option 1 PT LCD—Date Display Selects the order that the month and date are shown on the displays of extensions. Default Month-Date Value Range Date-Month, Month-Date Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References...
  • Page 464 4.18 [2-9] System Options PT LCD—Password / PIN Display Selects whether passwords and PINs (Personal Identification Number) are hidden or shown on the displays of extensions while being entered. Default Hide Value Range Hide, Display Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 465 4.18 [2-9] System Options Default On (Solid) Value Range On (Solid): Red on Flash: Slow red flashing Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Manual References 6.1.7 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button 10.1.1 LED Indication PT Fwd / DND—Fwd/DND key mode when Idle Selects the function of the FWD/DND button (fixed button) when it is pressed in idle status.
  • Page 466 4.18 [2-9] System Options Default Do Not Page Value Range Do Not Page, Page Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND 5.9 [3-4] Paging Group Feature Manual References 13.1.1 Paging PT Operation—Off Hook Monitor for KX-T74xx/T76xx Enables the use of Off-Hook Monitor with KX-T7400, KX-T7600, or KX-DT300 series telephones and IP-PTs.

  • Page 467: Pt Operation—One-Touch Busy Override By Sco Key

    4.18 [2-9] System Options Value Range Enable: Pressing the S-CO button activates the Privacy Release feature Disable: Pressing the S-CO button switches the information shown on the PT display. Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 13.1.14 Privacy Release PT Operation—One-touch Busy Override by SCO key...
  • Page 468 4.18 [2-9] System Options Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None PT Operation—PT Ring Off Setting Specifies whether incoming call ringing can be turned off at individual extensions. If disabled, users cannot prevent incoming calls from ringing.
  • Page 469 4.18 [2-9] System Options Feature Manual References 8.1.1 Hands-free Answerback PT Operation—Automatic Hold by ICM / CO / ICD Group key Selects whether calls are disconnected or held when an INTERCOM, PDN, CO, or ICD Group button is pressed while having a conversation. Default Disconnect Value Range...
  • Page 470 4.18 [2-9] System Options Option 2 Extension Clear—Call Waiting Specifies whether the Call Waiting setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed. Default Clear Value Range Clear, Do not clear Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 5.1.5 Extension Feature Clear...
  • Page 471 4.18 [2-9] System Options Value Range Clear, Do not clear Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 5.1.5 Extension Feature Clear CODEC—System CODEC Selects the codec type for DPTs and PSs. Default µ-Law Value Range A-Law, µ-Law Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 472 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None CODEC—Priority Notification from SIP Network (for Incoming Call) Specifies whether the priority notification from the SIP network is used in place of the PBX’s codec priority for SIP CO lines. Default Disable Value Range...
  • Page 473 4.18 [2-9] System Options Redial—Automatic Redial when No Answer (ISDN) Selects whether Automatic Redial to an ISDN line is performed when the called party does not answer within a preprogrammed time period. Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References 4.5 [2-3] Timers &...

  • Page 474: Extension - Co Call Limitation—For Incoming Call

    4.18 [2-9] System Options Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 15.1.1 Redial, Last Number Extension - CO Call Limitation—For Incoming Call Selects whether the time limit for extension-to-CO line calls applies to outgoing calls only or for both outgoing and incoming calls.
  • Page 475 4.18 [2-9] System Options Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.18 Conference 13.1.25 Private Network Features—QSIG—Enhanced Features Option 3 Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Called by Voice Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 1. Confirmation Tone 1 is heard from a PT when it receives a call in voice-calling mode.
  • Page 476 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.20 Confirmation Tone 8.1.1 Hands-free Answerback 13.1.1 Paging Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-1 : Start Talking after Making Call / Call from Doorphone Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 3-1. Confirmation Tone 3-1 is heard from an extension when, for example, it pages another extension, or from a doorphone when the doorphone button is pressed.

  • Page 477: Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference

    4.18 [2-9] System Options Feature Manual References 3.1.20 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 4-1. Confirmation Tone 4-1 is heard from an extension when a new party joins a conference call. Default Enable Value Range...

  • Page 478: Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone

    4.18 [2-9] System Options Confirmation Tone—Tone 5 : Hold Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 5. Confirmation Tone 5 is heard from an extension when it holds a call. Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...

  • Page 479: Echo Cancel—Conference

    4.18 [2-9] System Options Value Range Type A, Type B Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 4.1.4 Dial Tone Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS Selects the dial tone the PBX (instead of the network) sends to the caller when a call is made using the ARS feature, or ISDN En Bloc dialing.
  • Page 480 4.18 [2-9] System Options Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.18 Conference Echo Cancel—CO-to-CO Enables the use of the ECHO card for CO-to-CO line calls. Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 481 4.18 [2-9] System Options Feature Manual References None Echo Cancel—Extension to Digital Line Enables the use of the ECHO card for extension-to-ISDN/T1 line calls. If set to "Enable", the echo canceller card is used for extension-to-ISDN/T1 line calls. If set to "Disable", the echo canceller card is not used for extension-to-ISDN/T1 line calls. Default Disable Value Range...
  • Page 482 4.18 [2-9] System Options DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for Direct Incoming Call Specifies whether a DSS button will light up or flash when a call rings at the specified extension. To enable this setting, DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call on this screen must be set to ON or Flash. Default Enable Value Range...

  • Page 483: Dss Key—Automatic Transfer For Extension Call

    4.18 [2-9] System Options DSS Key—Automatic Transfer for Extension Call Specifies whether pressing a DSS or SDN button during an extension-to-extension call disconnects the current call or places the call on consultation hold. Default Disable Value Range Disable: The PBX disconnects the current call, and calls the extension assigned to the DSS or SDN button. Enable: The PBX places the current call on consultation hold.

  • Page 484: Send Clip Of Co Caller—When Call Is Transferred To Co (Clip Of Held Party)

    4.18 [2-9] System Options Default Value Range 0–15 Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.3 Caller ID Private Network—TIE Call by Extension Numbering (Activation Key Required) Enables extensions at two PBXs connected in a network to have the same leading number. For example, extension 101 is registered at PBX 1, and extension 102 is registered at PBX 2.

  • Page 485: Send Clip Of Co Caller—When Call Is Forwarded To Co

    4.18 [2-9] System Options Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation) Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is forwarded to CO Selects whether the CLIP number of the calling party or the CLIP number of the forwarding extension or virtual PS is sent to the forwarding destination to identify the origin of a CO line call.
  • Page 486 4.18 [2-9] System Options Enable: The CLIP number of the calling extension is sent. Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation) 9.1.4 ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations 13.1.18 Private Network Features—Network ICD Group System Wireless—Out of Range Registration Selects whether the PBX can set the status of a PS to Out of Range if no signal is received from the PS for a preset length of time.

  • Page 487: Slt—Message Waiting Lamp Pattern (Kx-Tde Series Only)

    4.18 [2-9] System Options Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Parameter Selection (for SDN) Feature Manual References 13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension Option 5 SLT—SLT Hold Mode Selects how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT.
  • Page 488 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 11.1.3 Message Waiting Whisper OHCA—for SLT / APT / KX-T72xx Enables the use of Whisper OHCA to SLTs and IP-PTs, and DPTs other than KX-T7400 series, KX-T7600 series, or KX-DT300 series. Default Disable Value Range...
  • Page 489 4.18 [2-9] System Options PT Feature Access—No. 1–8 Specifies the System Feature Access Menu (1–8) shown on the display of an extension. Default System Feature Access Menu 1: Call Back Cancel System Feature Access Menu 2: Call Pickup Direct System Feature Access Menu 3: Call Pickup Group System Feature Access Menu 4: Doorphone Call System Feature Access Menu 5: Door Open System Feature Access Menu 6: External BGM...

  • Page 490: Isdn Option—Calling Party Name Presentation To Pri

    4.18 [2-9] System Options ISDN Option—Calling Party Name Presentation to PRI23 Specifies whether the name of the calling party is displayed when making a call to the ISDN network. Default Disable Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...

  • Page 491: Built-In Communication Assistant—System Status Retry Counter

    4.18 [2-9] System Options Value Range 0–60 s Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.24 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Built-in Communication Assistant—System status retry counter Specifies the number of times that the alive check is repeated for First Party Call Control CTI such as Communication Assistant (CA).
  • Page 492 4.18 [2-9] System Options Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.24 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) 3rd Party CTI—System status retry counter Specifies the number of times that the alive check is repeated for Third Party Call Control CTI. When the alive check has been attempted the programmed number of times without success, the PBX assumes that the logical connection with the CTI application software has been lost.
  • Page 493 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.24 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) 3rd Party CTI—CDR retry counter Specifies the number of times that the alive check of CDR is repeated for Third Party Call Control CTI. When the alive check has been attempted the programmed number times, the association is released automatically.

  • Page 494: Cti Hold—Forced Idle When Hold By Pdn/Sdn Key

    4.18 [2-9] System Options CTI Make Call—SLT Ring Specifies whether to ring an SLT when a call is made from CTI, instead of the SLT. Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None...

  • Page 495: Incoming Call Log—Fwd All / Fwd Busy

    4.18 [2-9] System Options Default Enable (Not Answered) Value Range Enable (Not Answered), Disable Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.5 Call Log, Incoming Incoming Call Log—Fwd All / Fwd Busy Specifies whether the following types of calls are recorded in the incoming call log of the original destination. •...
  • Page 496 4.18 [2-9] System Options Value Range Answered, Not Answered Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.5 Call Log, Incoming PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 497: 2-10] Extension Cid Settings

    4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings 4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings Various settings for extension Caller ID can be programmed. Extension Caller ID Modulation Type Specifies the modulation frequency to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT. Default Bell202(Bellcore) Value Range V.23(ETSI), Bell202(Bellcore)
  • Page 498 4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings Default 180 bits Value Range 10 ´ n (n=3–40) bits Maintenance Console Location 4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.3 Caller ID Channel Seizure Wait Time Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to send the seizure signal following the first ring when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.
  • Page 499 4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings Maintenance Console Location 4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.3 Caller ID Additional Local Trunk Access Code to Extension Caller ID Enables the PBX to automatically add a CO Line Access number to the received telephone number when sending the Caller ID number of an incoming CO line call to an SLT.
  • Page 500 4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings Feature Manual References 3.1.3 Caller ID Send Caller ID Name to Extension Enables the PBX to send the caller’s name when sending Caller ID information to an SLT. Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 501 4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings Default 0 dB Value Range -14 dB, -12 dB, -10 dB, -8 dB, -6 dB, -4 dB, -2 dB, 0 dB Maintenance Console Location 4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.3 Caller ID FSK Transmission Level (for MCSLC Card) Specifies the transmission level for FSK signal modulation for MCSLC cards.

  • Page 502: 2-11-1] Audio Gain-Paging/Moh

    4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH 4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Gain levels for the External Pager/External BGM ports can be programmed. Paging—EPG (External Pager) (for KX-NCP series)/EPG 1 (External Pager 1) (for KX-TDE series) Specifies the paging volume for External Pager port 1. KX-NCP series PBXs have only one External Pager port.
  • Page 503 4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Paging—Paging Level from PT Speaker Specifies the volume when paging is broadcast through the speaker of a PT. Default 0 dB Value Range -15dB, -12dB, -9dB, -6dB, -3dB, 0dB, 3dB, 6dB Maintenance Console Location 4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Programming Manual References 5.9 [3-4] Paging Group Feature Manual References...
  • Page 504 4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Value Range -11–11 dB Maintenance Console Location 4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Programming Manual References 4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM Feature Manual References 11.1.4 Music on Hold 2.1.1 BGM (Background Music) PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 505: 2-11-2] Audio Gain-Card

    4.21 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card 4.21 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card Gain levels can be programmed for each type of card. Up Gain (To PBX) Specifies the volume for audio signals from the selected type of card to the PBX. Default Depends on card type. Value Range -15–15 dB Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 506 4.21 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 507: [3] Group

    Section 5 [3] Group Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 508: 3-1-1] Trunk Group-Trg Settings

    CO lines can be organized into trunk groups. The settings of each trunk group determine the settings of the CO lines within that group. A maximum of 64 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 96 (with the KX-TDE600) trunk groups can be programmed.

  • Page 509: Line Hunting Order

    5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Feature Manual References 13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES Line Hunting Order Specifies the CO line hunting sequence for the trunk group. The hunting sequence can be programmed to start from the lowest or highest numbered CO lines, or to rotate uniformly among all CO lines. Default High ->...
  • Page 510 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Default Value Range None, 60 ´ n (n = 1–60) s Maintenance Console Location 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings 4.18 [2-9] System Options 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Feature Manual References 3.1.17 CO Line Call Limitation Caller ID Modification Table...

  • Page 511: Disa Tone Detection—Silence

    5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Feature Manual References None DISA Tone Detection—Silence Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated CO-to-CO line call by silence detection. Default Disable Value Range...

  • Page 512: Disa Tone Detection—Cyclic

    5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Feature Manual References 4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access) DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated CO-to-CO line call by cyclic signal detection. Default Enable Value Range...

  • Page 513: Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Continuous

    5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Continuous Enables the disconnection of an SVM-originated CO-to-CO line call by continuous signal detection. Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 16.1.9 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
  • Page 514 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Feature Manual References None Host PBX Access Code 1–10 Specifies the feature number used to access a CO line from the host PBX. Default Not stored.

  • Page 515: 3-1-2] Trunk Group-Local Access Priority

    Specifies the trunk group assigned to the corresponding priority level. Select the blank option to not assign a trunk group to the priority. Default For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Priority 1–64 = Trunk Group No. 1–64 For KX-TDE600: Priority 1–96 = Trunk Group No. 1–96...

  • Page 516: 3-1-3] Caller Id Modification

    5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification The telephone numbers of incoming callers can be modified automatically according to preprogrammed modification tables, and then recorded for calling back. Leading Digits After the caller’s number is modified by the Length of Digits Modification Tables or CLIP Modification Tables, the PBX checks the leading digits of the modified number for an area code programmed in the Caller ID Modification Table assigned to that trunk group.
  • Page 517 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Maintenance Console Location 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Programming Manual References 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings— Caller ID Modification Table 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial Feature Manual References 3.1.3 Caller ID Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the incoming caller’s number in the place of the removed digits. Default Local / International Call Data 1–10: Not stored.
  • Page 518 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Default Value Range 1–31 Maintenance Console Location 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Programming Manual References 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Called Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private Feature Manual References 3.1.3 Caller ID...
  • Page 519 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Value Range Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Programming Manual References 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Called Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private Feature Manual References 3.1.3 Caller ID...
  • Page 520 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Removed Number of Digits Specifies the number of leading digits to be removed from the incoming caller’s number for each type of network numbering plan. Default International: 0 National: 0 Subscriber: 0 Value Range 0–9 Maintenance Console Location 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Programming Manual References...

  • Page 521: 3-1-4] Dialing Plan

    5.4 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan 5.4 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan The PBX sends all of the dialed digits at once after an extension user completes dialing. The PBX can recognize the end of dialing when the dialed telephone number starts with the programmed leading number and contains the programmed total number of digits.
  • Page 522 5.4 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the number dialed by en-bloc dialing in the place of the removed digits. Default Not stored.

  • Page 523: 3-1-4] Dialing Plan-Auto Assign

    5.5 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan—Auto Assign 5.5 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan—Auto Assign It is possible to assign a set of leading numbers automatically. Select Auto Assigning Table Selects the set of preset leading number values to assign to the active dialing plan table. When Type D is selected, you will be prompted to enter a 3-digit area code, and 7 "X"s, in cells 1 through 47 of the dialing plan table.

  • Page 524: 3-2] Extension Group

    Extensions can be assigned to a tenant according to their extension user groups. An extension user group can belong to only one tenant. However, one extension user group can belong to several call pickup groups and several paging groups. A maximum of 8 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 32 (with the KX-TDE600) tenants can be programmed.
  • Page 525 5.6 [3-2] Extension Group Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES 17.1.3 Tenant Service Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 526: 3-3] Call Pickup Group

    Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group can belong to up to 8 call pickup groups. A maximum of 64 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/ KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 96 (with the KX-TDE600) call pickup groups can be programmed.
  • Page 527 5.7 [3-3] Call Pickup Group Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 3.1.8 Call Pickup 7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 528: 3-3] Call Pickup Group-All Setting

    6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 3.1.8 Call Pickup 7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES Extension Group 1–32 (KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 1– 96 (KX-TDE600) Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding pickup group. Default ON for the same-numbered call pickup group...
  • Page 529 5.8 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting 7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 530: 3-4] Paging Group

    Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. External pagers can also be assigned to a paging group. One extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple paging groups. A maximum of 32 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 96 (with the KX-TDE600) paging groups can be programmed.
  • Page 531 5.9 [3-4] Paging Group Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 13.1.1 Paging 7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 532: 3-4] Paging Group-All Setting

    6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 13.1.1 Paging 7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES Extension Group 1–32 (KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 1– 96 (KX-TDE600) Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding paging group. Default ON for same numbered paging group...
  • Page 533 5.10 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting 7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 534: 3-4] Paging Group-External

    5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager 5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager External pagers can be assigned to a paging group. One external pager can belong to multiple paging groups. Paging Group Name Indicates the name of the paging group (reference only). Default Not stored.
  • Page 535 5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager External Pager 2 (KX-TDE series only) Specifies whether the external pager belongs to the corresponding paging group. Default Value Range ON (blue), OFF Maintenance Console Location 5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 13.1.1 Paging...

  • Page 536: 3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group-Group Settings

    5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group— Group Settings Extensions can be assigned as members of an incoming call distribution group. Calls to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to its member extensions as programmed. A maximum of 128 incoming call distribution groups can be programmed.
  • Page 537 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Distribution Method Selects the method for distributing calls to idle extensions of the incoming call distribution group. Default Ring Value Range Ring, UCD, Priority Hunting Maintenance Console Location 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 538 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings FWD Mode Specifies whether extensions in FWD mode ring when a call is received at the incoming call distribution group. Default Ring Value Range No Ring, Ring Maintenance Console Location 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND...
  • Page 539 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References 4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM 4.6 [2-4] Week Table 8.6 [6-6] Tenant—...

  • Page 540: Overflow Queuing Busy

    5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation) Overflow Queuing Busy Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
  • Page 541 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Maintenance Console Location 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Queuing Busy—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the overflow destination of calls that cannot be queued in each time mode. Default Not stored.

  • Page 542: Overflow No Answer

    5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Manual References 9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing Overflow No Answer Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group. Default Groups 001–064: 601–664 Groups 065–128: Not stored Value Range Max.
  • Page 543 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Time out & Manual Queue Redirection—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the overflow destination of queued calls when they are not answered or are redirected by Manual Queue Redirection in each time mode. Default Not stored.

  • Page 544: Queuing Time Table

    5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Default None Value Range None, 1–30 Maintenance Console Location 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Manual References 9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing Queuing Time Table Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
  • Page 545 Queuing Time Table—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the Queuing Time Table to be used in each time mode. Default None Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: None, Table 1–Table 64 For KX-TDE600: None, Table 1–Table 128 Maintenance Console Location 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References 4.6 [2-4] Week Table...
  • Page 546 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Maintenance Console Location 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Miscellaneous Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group. Default Groups 001–064: 601–664 Groups 065–128: Not stored...

  • Page 547: Extension No Answer Redirection Time

    5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Extension No Answer Redirection Time Specifies the length of time that a call queues at an extension before it is redirected to the next member extension of the incoming call distribution group, in UCD or Priority Hunting distribution method.

  • Page 548: Maximum No. Of Busy Extension

    5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Manual References 9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out Maximum No. of Busy Extension Specifies the number of extensions that can accept calls simultaneously in the incoming call distribution group. Default Max. Value Range Max.: Call arrives at an idle extension. 1–32: Call will not arrive at an idle extension when the number of busy extensions exceeds the assigned number.
  • Page 549 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings VIP Call Mode Enables VIP Call mode, to prioritize calls received from multiple incoming call distribution groups. Default Disable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 550 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration Group Log / Group FWD Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
  • Page 551 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Maintenance Console Location 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Incoming Call Log Memory Specifies the number of unanswered calls to the incoming call distribution group that can be logged in the call log memory.
  • Page 552 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Manual References 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) Group FWD Call from CO—Destination Specifies the forward destination of incoming CO line calls directed to the incoming call distribution group. Default Not stored. Value Range Max.
  • Page 553 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret] and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 554: 3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group-Group Settings-Member List

    5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group— Group Settings—Member List Each incoming call distribution group can have a maximum of 128 members (extensions) assigned to it, and each member can have its own delayed ringing and Wrap-up time settings. An extension can be a member of multiple incoming call distribution groups.

  • Page 555: Delayed Ring

    5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List Programming Manual References 5.24 [3-9] PS Ring Group— Group Name 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Name 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Name Feature Manual References 9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES Delayed Ring Specifies the delayed ringing setting of each member.
  • Page 556 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up Timer 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up Timer Feature Manual References 9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 557: 3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group-Queuing Time Table

    Queuing Time Table A Queuing Time Table can contain up to 16 sequences which control how calls waiting in a queue are handled. A maximum of 64 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 128 (with the KX-TDE600) Queuing Time Tables can be programmed.

  • Page 558: 3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group-Miscellaneous

    5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous 5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group— Miscellaneous Optional settings related to Incoming Call Distribution Groups can be programmed. Options—Call Log to ICD Group when ICD Member Answered Selects whether answered calls to an ICD Group are also logged in the Incoming Call Log for the group, in addition to the log of the extension that answered the call.

  • Page 559: Options—Longest Idle Distribution (Activation Key Required)

    5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Options—ICD Group Key Mode Selects whether ICD Group buttons at extensions operate as normal or in Enhanced Phantom button mode. When set to Enhanced Phantom mode, creating an ICD Group button at an extension using PT personal programming automatically registers the extension as a member of the relevant ICD Group.
  • Page 560 5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings and 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings become unavailable. Default Extension Value Range Extension: The timer is activated after all calls to or from the extension, including a retrieved call on hold. ICD Group Member: The timer is only activated after calls to the extension through an ICD Group.

  • Page 561: 3-6] Extension Hunting Group

    (day/lunch/break/night). A maximum of 64 (with the KX-NCP500/ KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 128 (with the KX-TDE600) hunting groups can be programmed, each containing up to 16 extensions.
  • Page 562 5.16 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group Feature Manual References 9.1.9 Idle Extension Hunting 7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES Overflow—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the overflow destination of an unanswered call in each time mode. Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Maintenance Console Location 5.16 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group Programming Manual References...

  • Page 563: 3-6] Extension Hunting Group-Member List

    5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List 5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List Each hunting group can contain up to 16 extensions. Select the hunting group to program from the Hunting Group No. list. To assign members to the group, enter the extension numbers in Extension Number or click Extension No.

  • Page 564: 3-7-1] Vm(Dpt) Group-System Settings

    5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings 5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DPT Integration can be connected to DPT ports of the PBX. The DPT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DPT) Group.

  • Page 565: Overflow To Mailbox For Call To Icd Group

    5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Feature Manual References 19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group 19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Overflow to Mailbox for Call to ICD Group Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the called extension to the VPS when a call is redirected from an incoming call distribution group to the VM (DPT) group by Intercept Routing.
  • Page 566 5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Feature Manual References 19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group 19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 567: 3-7-2] Vm(Dpt) Group-Unit Settings

    5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings 5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings A VM (DPT) group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. To assign extension numbers to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View.
  • Page 568 5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings 19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Centralized VM Unit Setting Floating Extension No. (TIE) Specifies the floating extension number of the centralized VM (DPT) group. This floating extension number must start with the number used to access a TIE line or the extensions of another PBX. Default Not stored.
  • Page 569 5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings 19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 570: 3-7-2] Vm(Dpt) Group-Unit Settings-Member List

    5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List 5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List Displays information on the settings of all relevant ports. Only ports set to VM(DPT) in DPT Type—Type of 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port will be displayed. In addition, the other information displayed here can also be set in 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port.
  • Page 571 5.1.7 Extension Port Configuration VM Unit No. Indicates the unit number of the connected VPS (reference only). Default Current unit number Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1, 2 For KX-TDE600: 1–8 Maintenance Console Location 5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List Programming Manual References DPT Type—Type...
  • Page 572 5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List Extension No. Indicates the extension number assigned to the VM port (reference only). Default Assigned extension number Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List Programming Manual References DPT Type—Type 5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings...

  • Page 573: 3-8-1] Vm(Dtmf) Group-System Settings

    5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DTMF Integration can be connected to SLT ports of the PBX. The SLT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DTMF) Group. A maximum of 2 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 8 (with the KX-TDE600) VM (DTMF) Groups can be programmed.
  • Page 574 5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings VM DTMF Status Signal—Reorder Tone Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the dialed number is invalid. Default Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause]) Maintenance Console Location 5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 575 5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Maintenance Console Location 5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None VM DTMF Status Signal—Confirm Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when a certain feature (e.g., Message Waiting) has been successfully set or canceled on an extension.
  • Page 576 5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Feature Manual References None VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to VM Ringback Tone Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to the VPS and the PBX is calling another port of the VPS. Default Value Range Max.

  • Page 577: Vm Dtmf Command—Listening Message

    5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to Extension Ringback Tone Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to another extension and the PBX is calling the destination extension. Default Value Range Max.
  • Page 578 5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Default Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause]) Maintenance Console Location 5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 11.1.3 Message Waiting VM DTMF Command—Switching to AA Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS to switch from VM Service Mode to AA Service Mode.
  • Page 579 5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Maintenance Console Location 5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Timing—DTMF Length for VM Specifies the length of DTMF signals the PBX sends to the VPS. Default 80 ms Value Range 80 ms, 160 ms Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 580 5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Feature Manual References None Timing—Waiting Time before Sending Follow on ID Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before sending the Follow on ID to the VPS after the VPS has answered a call. Default 1.5 s Value Range...

  • Page 581: Others—Call Waiting On Vm Group

    5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Others—Call Waiting on VM Group Enables the queuing of calls when all extension ports of the VM (DTMF) group are busy. (Call Waiting tone is not sent to any VM port.) Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings...
  • Page 582 5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Default None Value Range None, Answer by Mailbox, AA Maintenance Console Location 5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 9.1.11 Intercept Routing Others—Mailbox for Extension Specifies whether the mailboxes use the same numbers as the extensions and incoming call distribution groups, or use different numbers as programmed for each extension or incoming call distribution group.
  • Page 583 5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Value Range By PBX, By VM Maintenance Console Location 5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 11.1.3 Message Waiting Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 584: 3-8-2] Vm(Dtmf) Group-Group Settings

    5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings 5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings A VM (DTMF) group has a floating extension number, and can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. To assign members to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View.
  • Page 585 5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings Type Specifies the initial service mode in which the VPS answers calls. Default Value Range AA, VM Maintenance Console Location 5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 586: 3-8-2] Vm(Dtmf) Group-Group Settings-Member List

    5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List 5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings— Member List Select the group to program from the VM(DTMF) Group Number list. To assign members to the group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).
  • Page 587 5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List Feature Manual References 19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 588: 3-9] Ps Ring Group

    One PS can belong to multiple PS ring groups. A maximum of 32 PS ring groups can be programmed, each containing up to 64 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000), 128 (with the KX-TDE100/ KX-TDE200), or 512 (with the KX-TDE600) PS extensions.
  • Page 589 5.24 [3-9] PS Ring Group Incoming Trunk Call Information Display Specifies the information of the incoming CO line call to be shown on the displays of the PSs that belong to the PS ring group. If the caller’s name or called party’s name is not recognized, the telephone number will be shown.

  • Page 590: 3-9] Ps Ring Group-Member List

    5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List 5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List Each PS Ring Group can have up to 64 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000), 128 (with the KX-TDE100/ KX-TDE200), or 512 (with the KX-TDE600) PS extensions assigned. Select the group to program from the PS Ring Group Number list.
  • Page 591 5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List Feature Manual References 13.1.31 PS—Ring Group Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 592: 3-10] Conference Group

    5.26 [3-10] Conference Group 5.26 [3-10] Conference Group A conference group is a group of telephones (extensions or outside destinations) that ring when a conference group call is made. One destination number can be assigned to multiple conference groups. Up to 31 members can be assigned to each of 8 conference groups.
  • Page 593 5.26 [3-10] Conference Group Feature Manual References 3.1.19 Conference Group Call Ability to Talk Enables extension users to use the push-to-talk feature during a conference group call, when Broadcast Mode is set to "Enable". The push-to-talk feature allows extension users to speak during the call by pressing any of their dial keys.

  • Page 594: 3-10] Conference Group-Member List

    5.27 [3-10] Conference Group—Member List 5.27 [3-10] Conference Group—Member List Up to 31 members can be assigned to each conference group. Select the group to program from the Conference Group No. list. When Broadcast Mode is set to "Disable", only up to 7 members can be assigned to a group. All of these members are automatically allowed to speak when the call starts.
  • Page 595 5.27 [3-10] Conference Group—Member List Feature Manual References 3.1.19 Conference Group Call Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 596 5.27 [3-10] Conference Group—Member List PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 597: [4] Extension

    Section 6 [4] Extension Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 598: 4-1-1] Wired Extension-Extension Settings

    6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings For each slot in which an extension card is installed, a certain number of extension ports are displayed. For each extension port, various extension settings can be assigned. To search for a specific extension, enter the extension number or the extension name in the search box and click Find Next.
  • Page 599 Feature Manual References None Shelf Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only). Default Current shelf type/number Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Physical, Virtual For KX-TDE600: Shelf number, Virtual Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 600 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Default Current port number Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Feature Manual References None Port Type Indicates the extension port type (reference only).
  • Page 601 Specifies the extension user group to which the extension belongs. Extension user groups are used to compose tenants, call pickup groups and paging groups. Default For Extensions connected with V-IPEXT card: For Extensions connected with other cards: Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–32 For KX-TDE600: 1–96 Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 602 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES 17.1.3 Tenant Service Specifies the COS of the extension. Default Value Range 1–64 Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Manual References...
  • Page 603 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 5.1.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number) Intercept Destination Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Default Starting at 101 Value Range Max.
  • Page 604 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Manual References None Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls in each time mode for Intercept Routing–No Answer and Intercept Routing–DND. Note that Intercept Routing–Busy calls are routed using Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy below.
  • Page 605 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Default Starting at 101 Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Feature Manual References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension.
  • Page 606 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Feature Manual References 9.1.11 Intercept Routing ISDN CLIP Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension.
  • Page 607 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None CLIP ID Specifies the CLIP number sent to the public network to show on the called party’s telephone display when making a CO line call. Default Not stored. Value Range Max.
  • Page 608 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation) ARS Itemized Code/2nd CLIP (10 digits) Specifies the itemized billing code or 2nd CLIP number used by the ARS feature for identifying calls made from the extension for accounting and billing purposes. Default Not stored.
  • Page 609 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings COLR Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number of the extension on the caller’s telephone display when answering a call. Default Disable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 610 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Wireless XDP Specifies the extension number of the PS with which Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is established. To enable Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, the PS must be turned off once and then turned on after assigning this setting.
  • Page 611 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 4.15 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO 4.16 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone 4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Feature Manual References 15.1.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection Automatic Recording Specifies the floating extension number to use for the Automatic Recording feature to automatically record...
  • Page 612 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration Transfer Recall Destination Specifies the transfer recall destination when an extension user transfers a call with the Call Transfer without Announcement feature and the transferred call is not answered within a certain time period. Default Not stored.
  • Page 613 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Manual References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Manual C.
  • Page 614 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Automatic C. Waiting Specifies whether to receive call waiting notifications for calls from a CO line, doorphone calls, and calls via an incoming call distribution group. Default Value Range Off, On Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 615 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 8.1.6 Hot Line Data Mode Sets or cancels the protection against tones or interruptions from other extensions during communication.
  • Page 616 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Feature Manual References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Default Not stored. Value Range Max.

  • Page 617: Absent Message

    6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 3.1.8 Call Pickup Executive Override Deny Specifies whether calls can be interrupted by other extensions. Default Disable Value Range Disable: Allows other extension users to interrupt an existing call Enable: Prevents other extension users from interrupting an existing call Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 618 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Intercom Call by Voice Selects the method of receiving intercom calls. When Deny Voice Call is selected, the extension will always ring when receiving calls, regardless of how the caller wants to make the call. Default Tone Call Value Range...
  • Page 619 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Outgoing Preferred Line Selects the line to be seized after going off-hook to make a call. Default ICM/PDN Value Range...
  • Page 620 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range No Line: No line is selected. Select a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer a call. Ringing Line: The longest ringing call is selected. PDN: The call arriving at any PDN button is selected. F-1–F-84: The call arriving at a flexible button (F-1–F-84) is selected.
  • Page 621 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration LCS Answer Mode Specifies whether the extension’s mailbox is monitored in Hands-free or Private mode. Default Hands free Value Range...
  • Page 622 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Feature Manual References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 623 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Incoming Call Display Selects which caller information is shown on the first line of the extension’s display. Default Caller ID Name Value Range Caller ID Name, CO Line Name, DID Name Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 624 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Automatic Answer for CO Call Enables the extension to answer an incoming CO line call automatically after a certain number of rings without going off-hook, when Hands-free Answerback has been set on the extension.
  • Page 625 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Feature Manual References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...

  • Page 626: Display Lock / Svm Lock

    6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Flexible Button Programming Mode Specifies whether the extension user can modify all flexible buttons without limitation, or only the One-touch Dialing buttons. When the mode is set to One-touch Dial, there is no need to enter "2" before the number when customizing a One-touch Dialing button.
  • Page 627 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Default Unlock Value Range Unlock, Lock Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.5 Call Log, Incoming 16.1.9 SVM (Simplified Voice Message) Paging Deny Specifies whether paging of the extension from other extensions is enabled. Default Disable Value Range...
  • Page 628 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Feature Manual References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Default Not stored. Value Range Max.
  • Page 629 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Manual References None Flash Mode during CO Conversation Selects the function of the FLASH/RECALL button during a CO line conversation. Default Value Range EFA, Terminate, Flash Recall Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 630 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Outgoing Call Log Memory Specifies the number of telephone numbers dialed by the extension that are retained in the extension’s Outgoing Call Log memory. Default Value Range 1–100 Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 631 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Default Starting at 101 Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Feature Manual References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension.
  • Page 632 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Extension Caller ID Enables the extension to send Caller ID information to an SLT. Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References...

  • Page 633: Slt Mw Mode (Kx-Tde Series Only)

    6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.3 Caller ID SLT MW Mode (KX-TDE series only) Enables the use of the Message Waiting Lamp on an SLT extension connected to the extension port. Default Disable Value Range Disable, MW-Lamp Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 634 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out Option 9 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Default Starting at 101 Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Feature Manual References...
  • Page 635 Value Range Disable, Basic Only, Enable Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600)—Port Number— Built-in Communication Assistant Server Feature Manual References 3.1.1 CA (Communication Assistant) FWD / DND Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings for each extension can be referred.
  • Page 636 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Default Starting at 101 Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Feature Manual References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension.
  • Page 637 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Feature Manual References 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) Keep ring after FWD NA to CO Specifies whether an extension continues to ring after forwarding an incoming call to an outside destination via FWD N/A or FWD Busy N/A.
  • Page 638 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) DND Availability for FWD/DND Key (CO) Indicates the current DND status for incoming CO line calls (reference only). Default Value Range Off, On Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Feature Manual References...
  • Page 639 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Feature Manual References 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) FWD Availability for FWD/DND Key (Extension) Indicates the current FWD status for incoming intercom calls (reference only).
  • Page 640 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Feature Manual References 4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb) FWD Mode for Call from Extension Indicates the forwarding type of incoming intercom calls (reference only). Default None Value Range...
  • Page 641 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 642: 4-1-1] Wired Extension-Extension Settings-Clip Generate

    6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate 6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings— CLIP Generate CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together. Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten. If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded. Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext.
  • Page 643 6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate Feature Manual References 3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation) Parameter—Deleting Digits Specifies the number of digits to be deleted from the start of an extension number when using it as part of the CLIP number. Default Value Range 0–5...
  • Page 644 6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation) PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 645: 4-1-2] Wired Extension-Fwd/Dnd

    6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND For each extension, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for incoming intercom and CO line calls. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
  • Page 646 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Feature Manual References 4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb) 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 647: 4-1-3] Wired Extension-Speed Dial

    6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial 6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial Personal Speed Dialing allows extension users to dial frequently dialed numbers using two-digit speed dialing numbers (00–99). A maximum of 100 Personal Speed Dialing numbers can be programmed for each extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.

  • Page 648: 4-1-4] Wired Extension-Flexible Button

    6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References 6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy Feature Manual References None Parameter Selection (for Single CO) Specifies the CO line to be accessed. Default Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–128 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...
  • Page 649 None Feature Manual References 3.1.16 CO Line Access Parameter Selection (for Group CO) Specifies the trunk group to be accessed. Default Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–64 For KX-TDE600: 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References...
  • Page 650 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.7 Call Park Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out) Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the extension belongs to are logged in to or logged out from.
  • Page 651 4.1.5 Dial Tone Transfer Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual) Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic. Default Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button...
  • Page 652 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Manual References 17.1.5 Time Service Parameter Selection (for SDN) Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button. Default Immediate Value Range Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References...
  • Page 653 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Extension Number (for Message Waiting) Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which messages are checked.
  • Page 654 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which CO line calls are forwarded.
  • Page 655 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Manual References 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) Extension Number (for Call Log) Specifies the extension’s own number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which call log information is displayed. If the cell is left empty, the extension will display its own call log information.
  • Page 656 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Extension Number (for Hurry-up) Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection). Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References...
  • Page 657 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer) Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF/DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.
  • Page 658 None Feature Manual References None Dial (for One-touch) Specifies the number to be dialed. The PBX can have a maximum of 2000 (with the KX-NCP500/ KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 5000 (with the KX-TDE600) One-touch Dialing buttons for extensions and DSS Consoles. Default Not stored.
  • Page 659 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Manual References 12.1.4 One-touch Dialing Dial (for NDSS) Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station Selection. Note that only extension numbers that have been previously registered in 11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table can be specified here.
  • Page 660 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service) Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode. Default Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button...
  • Page 661 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park) Specifies the number of the parking zone a call is to be parked in when a Call Park button with Parameter Selection (for Call Park) on this screen set to Specific is pressed. Default Value Range 0–99...
  • Page 662 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Type This parameter is equivalent to Type on the Key Setting screen. Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type Feature Manual References None Extension Number This parameter is equivalent to Extension Number on the Key Setting screen.
  • Page 663 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting → Dial (for One-touch) → Dial (for NDSS) Feature Manual References None Parameter 1 This parameter is equivalent to Parameter Selection on the Key Setting screen. Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References...
  • Page 664 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Mailbox Number This parameter is equivalent to Ext No. of Mailbox on the Key Setting screen. Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer) Feature Manual References None...
  • Page 665 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Color of Background Specifies the color used for the label background for the corresponding button. Click Choose to select a color. Default White Value Range Any color Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References...
  • Page 666 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Telephone Type Telephone Type Selects the type of telephone for which you want to print a key label template. Default T7633 / T7636 Value Range T7633 / T7636 T7625 / T7630 / NT136 T7665 / NT265 / NT321 T7667 NT343 / NT346 / DT346 / DT343 / DT333 NT343 / NT346 with 60CO...

  • Page 667: 4-1-4] Wired Extension-Flexible Button-Flexible Button Data Copy

    6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy 6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Flexible button data copy The flexible button settings (including key label settings) of an extension can be copied to different extensions. Destination Extension Line Select the number and name of the extension that will receive the copied settings. Multiple extensions can be selected.

  • Page 668: 4-1-5] Wired Extension-Pf Button

    6.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button 6.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button Each Programmable Feature (PF) button can be customized to access a certain feature with one touch. A maximum of 12 PF buttons can be customized for each extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.

  • Page 669: 4-1-6] Wired Extension-Ndss Link Data - Send

    6.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send 6.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. Network BLF Data to NDSS Key of Other PBX - Other PBX (Network PBX ID=1) Selects whether extension status data is transmitted over the network for the selected extension.

  • Page 670: 4-1-7] Wired Extension-Simplified Voice Message

    For more information on Simplified Voice Message, see "16.1.9 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)" in the Feature Manual. Shelf Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only). Default Current shelf type/number Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Physical, Virtual For KX-TDE600: Shelf number, Virtual Maintenance Console Location 6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References...
  • Page 671 6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Default Current port number Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None...
  • Page 672 6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension (reference only). Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Name Feature Manual References None...
  • Page 673 6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message Default Value Range 1–100 Maintenance Console Location 6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 674: 4-2-1] Portable Station-Extension Settings

    6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings For each Portable Station (PS), various extension settings can be assigned. A maximum of 64 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000), 128 (with the KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200), or 512 (with the KX-TDE600) PSs can be programmed. To copy the settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to. The copied data includes FWD/DND and flexible button settings.
  • Page 675 Extension Group Specifies the extension user group to which the PS belongs. The extension user group is used to compose tenants, call pickup groups and paging groups. Default Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–32 For KX-TDE600: 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings...
  • Page 676 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Specifies the COS of the PS. Default Value Range 1–64 Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Manual References 3.1.22 COS (Class of Service) Extension PIN Specifies the PIN of the PS.
  • Page 677 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Intercept Destination Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.47 [1-2] Portable Station—...
  • Page 678 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy Feature Manual References...
  • Page 679 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.47 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension No. Feature Manual References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 680 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Feature Manual References 9.1.11 Intercept Routing ISDN CLIP Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Default Not stored.
  • Page 681 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Manual References None CLIP ID Specifies the CLIP number sent to the public network to show on the called party’s telephone display when making a CO line call. Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 682 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings ARS Itemized Code/2nd CLIP (10 digits) Specifies the itemized billing code or 2nd CLIP number used by the ARS feature for identifying the calls made from the PS for accounting and billing purposes. Default Not stored. Value Range Max.
  • Page 683 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Default Disable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation) Option 1 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Default Not stored.
  • Page 684 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.47 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name Feature Manual References None Ring Pattern Table Specifies the Ring Tone Pattern Table to be used by the PS. Default Value Range 1–8...
  • Page 685 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings— Floating Extension No. Feature Manual References 19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Programmed Mailbox No. Specifies the mailbox number of the PS’s mailbox for Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with DTMF Integration, or specifies a mailbox number for the Automatic Recording feature.
  • Page 686 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Option 2 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.47 [1-2] Portable Station Feature Manual References None...
  • Page 687 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range Off: No notification BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.11 CALL WAITING FEATURES Automatic C. Waiting Specifies whether to receive call waiting notification for a call from CO line, a doorphone call or a call via an incoming call distribution group.
  • Page 688 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start Feature Manual References 8.1.6 Hot Line Pickup Dial No. Specifies the number to be dialed automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.
  • Page 689 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Manual References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.47 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name Feature Manual References None...
  • Page 690 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Default Disable Value Range Disable: Allows other extension users to interrupt an existing call Enable: Prevents other extension users from interrupting an existing call Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 5.1.3 Executive Busy Override...
  • Page 691 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.47 [1-2] Portable Station Feature Manual References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Default Not stored.
  • Page 692 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Manual References 10.1.3 Line Preference—Outgoing Incoming Preferred Line Selects the line on which an incoming call is answered after going off-hook. Note that even if a specific PDN button is selected here, a call ringing at any PDN button on the extension will be answered when going off-hook.
  • Page 693 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.12 Call Waiting Tone LCS Recording Mode Specifies whether to continue or stop recording the message in the PS’s mailbox when the PS user answers a call that was being monitored. Default Stop Record Value Range...
  • Page 694 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Manual References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.47 [1-2] Portable Station Feature Manual References None Display Language...
  • Page 695 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Default Caller ID Name Value Range Caller ID Name, CO Line Name, DID Name Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 4.1.9 Display Information Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking Enables the first line of the display to show the call duration automatically after answering a CO line call.
  • Page 696 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.47 [1-2] Portable Station Feature Manual References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References...

  • Page 697: Svm Lock

    6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 12.1.4 One-touch Dialing SVM Lock Selects whether Simplified Voice Message Log information can be displayed at the extension or other extensions. Default Unlock Value Range Lock, Unlock Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message Feature Manual References...
  • Page 698 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.47 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name Feature Manual References None Character Input Mode Selects the character table to be used for entering characters.
  • Page 699 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range EFA, Terminate, Flash Recall Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 6.1.2 Flash/Recall/Terminate 5.1.1 EFA (External Feature Access) Incoming Call Log Memory Specifies the number of incoming CO line calls that are retained in the PS’s Incoming Call Log memory. Default Value Range 0–100...
  • Page 700 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 15.1.1 Redial, Last Number ISDN Bearer Selects the ISDN bearer mode. When Automatic is selected, the bearer mode is set automatically depending on the type of the PS.
  • Page 701 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.47 [1-2] Portable Station Feature Manual References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.47 [1-2] Portable Station—...
  • Page 702 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Wrap-up Timer Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before a PS will accept another call when logged in as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution Group. This timer is used when " Options—Wrap-up Timer based on"...
  • Page 703 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.47 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name Feature Manual References None PDN Delayed Ringing Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN buttons). Default Immediate Value Range...
  • Page 704 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600)—Port Number— Built-in Communication Assistant Server Feature Manual References 3.1.1 CA (Communication Assistant) FWD / DND Reference Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings for each PS can be referred.
  • Page 705 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.47 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name Feature Manual References None FWD No Answer Time Specifies the length of time that an incoming call rings at the PS before the call is forwarded. Default 15 s Value Range...
  • Page 706 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) FWD Availability for FWD/DND Key (CO) Indicates the current FWD status for incoming CO line calls (reference only). Default Value Range Off, On Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Manual References...
  • Page 707 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Default None Value Range None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Manual References 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) FWD Destination for Call from CO Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming CO line calls (reference only).
  • Page 708 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Manual References 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) DND Availability for FWD/DND Key (Extension) Indicates the current DND status for incoming intercom calls (reference only). Default Value Range Off, On...
  • Page 709 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) FWD Destination for Call from Extension Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls (reference only). Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References...

  • Page 710: 4-2-1] Portable Station-Extension Settings-Clip Generate

    6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate 6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings— CLIP Generate CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together. Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten. If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded. Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext.
  • Page 711 6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate Feature Manual References 3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation) Parameter—Deleting Digits Specifies the number of digits to be deleted from the start of an extension number when using it as part of the CLIP number. Default Value Range 0–4...
  • Page 712 6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate Programming Manual References 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Manual References 3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation) PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 713: 4-2-2] Portable Station-Fwd/Dnd

    6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND For each PS, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for incoming intercom and CO line calls. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list. To copy FWD/DND values from one location to another, click Copy to.
  • Page 714 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Manual References 4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb) 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 715: 4-2-3] Portable Station-Flexible Button

    6.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy Feature Manual References 6.1.3 Flexible Buttons Parameter Selection (for Single CO) Specifies the CO line to be accessed. Default Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–128 For KX-TDE600: 1–640 Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Document Version 2011-10...
  • Page 716 None Feature Manual References 3.1.16 CO Line Access Parameter Selection (for Group CO) Specifies the trunk group to be accessed. Default Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–64 For KX-TDE600: 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings...
  • Page 717 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Manual References 3.1.7 Call Park Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out) Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the PS belongs to are logged in to or logged out from. Default None Value Range None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually. All: All incoming call distribution groups that the PS belongs to.
  • Page 718 4.1.5 Dial Tone Transfer Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual) Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic. Default Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button...
  • Page 719 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Parameter Selection (for SDN) Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button. The value specified here is only used when System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD on 4.18 [2-9] System Options is set to "Enable". Default Immediate Value Range...
  • Page 720 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Manual References 9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES Extension Number (for Message Waiting) Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which messages are checked.
  • Page 721 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Group Log / Group FWD Feature Manual References 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which CO line calls are forwarded.
  • Page 722 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Manual References 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log-in to or log-out from. Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References...
  • Page 723 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References 5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings Feature Manual References 19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer) Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.
  • Page 724 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References 5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings 5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings Feature Manual References 19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration 19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Extension Number (for SDN) Specifies the floating extension number of the corresponding (owner) extension for the SDN button.
  • Page 725 None Feature Manual References None Dial (for One-touch) Specifies the number to be dialed. The PBX can have a maximum of 500 (with the KX-NCP500/ KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 1000 (with the KX-TDE600) One-touch Dialing buttons for PSs. Default Not stored. Value Range Max.

  • Page 726: Optional Parameter (Or Ringing Tone Type Number) (For Time Service)

    13.1.17 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection) Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service) Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode. Default Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button...
  • Page 727 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer) Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One-touch Two-way Transfer. (For example, a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a boss.) If the cell is left empty, the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time.
  • Page 728 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button → Extension Number (for DSS) → Extension Number (for G-DN) → Extension Number (for Message Waiting) → Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both)) → Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External)) → Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal)) →...
  • Page 729 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button → Parameter Selection (for SDN) Feature Manual References None Parameter 2 This parameter is equivalent to Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) on the Key Setting screen. Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting →...

  • Page 730: 4-2-3] Portable Station-Flexible Button-Flexible Button Data Copy

    6.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy 6.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Flexible button data copy The flexible button settings of a PS can be copied to different PSs. Destination Extension Line Select the number and name of the PS that will receive the copied settings. Multiple PSs can be selected. To select all PSs at once, click Select All.

  • Page 731: 4-2-4] Portable Station-Ndss Link Data - Send

    6.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send 6.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. Network BLF Data to NDSS Key of Other PBX - Other PBX (Network PBX ID=1) Selects whether extension status data is transmitted over the network for the selected extension.

  • Page 732: 4-2-5] Portable Station-Simplified Voice Message

    6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message 6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message The Simplified Voice Message feature can be provided for each PS. This screen allows you to specify which extension uses this feature, and the maximum number of messages that can be stored for each extension.
  • Page 733 6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message Feature Manual References None Simplified Voice Message Selects which card (MPR or ESVM) to use to store and play back greetings and messages for the extension. Each extension must be assigned to a specific card and block within the card, and can only use the assigned card/block.

  • Page 734: 4-2-6] Portable Station-Single Co Appearance

    Parameter Selection (for Single CO) Selects the CO line to be displayed on the PS. The CO line name, if set, is also displayed here. Default 1–12: 01–12 Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 01–128 For KX-TDE600: 01–640 Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-2-6] Portable Station—Single CO Appearance Programming Manual References 3.48 [1-3] Option—...

  • Page 735: 4-3] Dss Console

    6.18 [4-3] DSS Console 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console A DSS Console can be used in conjunction with a PT. A maximum of 8 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/ KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 64 (with the KX-TDE600) DSS Consoles can be programmed. The DPT Type —Type of the extension port that DSS Console is connected must be set to DSS in 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port...
  • Page 736 6.19 [4-3] DSS Console—DSS key data copy Feature Manual References 6.1.3 Flexible Buttons Parameter Selection (for Single CO) Specifies the CO line to be accessed. Default Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–128 For KX-TDE600: 1–640 Maintenance Console Location 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References 6.19 [4-3] DSS Console—DSS key data copy...
  • Page 737 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–64 For KX-TDE600: 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Feature Manual References 3.1.16 CO Line Access Parameter Selection (for Call Park) Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone.
  • Page 738 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console All: All incoming call distribution groups that the paired extension belongs to. Incoming Group: A pre-specified incoming call distribution group Maintenance Console Location 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out Parameter Selection (for Time Service) Selects which time modes are switched manually.
  • Page 739 4.1.5 Dial Tone Transfer Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual) Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic. Default Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console...
  • Page 740 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console Feature Manual References 13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension Extension Number (for DSS) Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed. Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References...
  • Page 741 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 11.1.3 Message Waiting Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom and CO line calls are forwarded.
  • Page 742 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console Maintenance Console Location 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Group Log / Group FWD Feature Manual References 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding) Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which intercom calls are forwarded.
  • Page 743 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 3.1.5 Call Log, Incoming Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log-in to or log-out from. Default Not stored. Value Range Max.
  • Page 744 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console Extension Number (for Two-way Record) Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the paired extension’s mailbox. Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References 5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings Feature Manual References...
  • Page 745 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console Maintenance Console Location 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References 5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings 5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings Feature Manual References 19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration 19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Extension Number (for SDN) Specifies the floating extension number of the PDN extension corresponding to the SDN button.
  • Page 746 None Feature Manual References None Dial (for One-touch) Specifies the number to be dialed. The PBX can have a maximum of 2000 (with the KX-NCP500/ KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 5000 (with the KX-TDE600) One-touch Dialing buttons for extensions and DSS Consoles. Default Not stored.
  • Page 747 13.1.17 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection) Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service) Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode. Default Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console...
  • Page 748 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console Feature Manual References 15.1.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park) Specifies the number of the parking zone a call is to be parked in when a Call Park button with Parameter Selection (for Call Park) on this screen set to Specific is pressed.
  • Page 749 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console Display Option—Key Setting & Key Label Name The Key Label Name function allows you to print out a key label template for flexible DSS buttons, according to the DSS Console you are using. Click a flexible button to display a Change—Flexible Button 01–66 screen and edit the button’s settings.
  • Page 750 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console Dial This parameter is equivalent to Dial on the Key Setting screen. Maintenance Console Location 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting → Dial (for One-touch) → Dial (for NDSS) Feature Manual References None Parameter 1...
  • Page 751 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting → Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service) → Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, G-DN, SDN) → Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park) Feature Manual References None...
  • Page 752 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console Default Black Value Range Any color Maintenance Console Location 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Color of Background Specifies the color used for the label background for the corresponding button. Click Choose to select a color. Default White Value Range...
  • Page 753 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console Maintenance Console Location 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None DSS Type DSS Type Selects the type of DSS Console for which you want to print a key label template. Default T7640 Value Range T7640, DT390, Other...

  • Page 754: 4-3] Dss Console-Dss Key Data Copy

    6.19 [4-3] DSS Console—DSS key data copy 6.19 [4-3] DSS Console—DSS key data copy The flexible DSS button settings (including key label settings) of a DSS Console can be copied to different DSS Consoles. Select the DSS Console that has the setting to copy to other DSS Consoles from the DSS Console No./ Pair Extension list, then click Copy to.

  • Page 755: [5] Optional Device

    Section 7 [5] Optional Device Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 756: 5-1] Doorphone

    7.1 [5-1] Doorphone 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone The settings to establish doorphone calls can be programmed. To assign destinations for doorphone calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting). Physical Location—Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf to which the doorphone is connected (reference only). Default Current shelf number Value Range...
  • Page 757 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Physical Location—Port Indicates the port number to which the doorphone is connected (reference only). Default Current port number Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 4.1.12 Doorphone Call Name Specifies the doorphone name Default...
  • Page 758 Feature Manual References 4.1.12 Doorphone Call Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number for the doorphone port in order to apply the Time Table (day/lunch/break/night). Default Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Programming Manual References 4.6 [2-4] Week Table...
  • Page 759 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Programming Manual References 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night 4.14 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block Feature Manual References 9.1.14 Internal Call Block 4.1.12 Doorphone Call VM Trunk Group Number Specifies the number of the VM trunk group sent to the VPS when the doorphone call destination is the floating extension number of a VM (DPT) group.

  • Page 760: 5-2] External

    7.2 [5-2] External Pager 7.2 [5-2] External Pager Settings for external pagers (external speakers) can be specified. Click Extension List View to view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types (see 2.5.7 Tool— Extension List View). Note For KX-NCP series PBXs, only one pager is supported. Page Number 1, Page Number 2—Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the external pager.
  • Page 761 7.2 [5-2] External Pager Feature Manual References 13.1.1 Paging 17.1.2 TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station) 2.1.1 BGM (Background Music) Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 762: 5-3-1] Voice Message-Disa System

    7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Direct Inward System Access (DISA) enables outside callers to access specific PBX features as if the caller were using an SLT extension of the PBX. For more information on DISA, see "4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)" in the Feature Manual. Option 1 DISA Security—DISA Security Mode Selects the DISA security mode to prevent unauthorized access to the PBX.
  • Page 763 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 20.1.1 Walking COS DISA Intercept—Intercept when destination through DISA sets DND Selects how DISA calls are handled if the destination sets DND, and disables Idle Extension Hunting. Default Busy Tone Value Range Busy Tone, Enable, Busy Message...
  • Page 764 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System DISA Intercept—Intercept when No Dial after DISA answers Selects how DISA calls are handled if the caller does not select any option from the menu. Default to Operator Value Range to Operator, to AA-0, to AA-9, Disable (Reorder Tone) Maintenance Console Location 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Programming Manual References...
  • Page 765 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Private Network Specifies whether the DISA port of the message card is released when a CO-to-TIE line call using DISA is established. To enable this setting, " CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Private Network" on this screen should be set to "Enable".
  • Page 766 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Private Network Enables CO-to-TIE line calls to be established using DISA. Default Disable Value Range Disable: CO-to-TIE line calls are established without using DISA. Enable (Get DISA): CO-to-TIE line calls are established using DISA, and DISA can be used to detect the end of the call.
  • Page 767 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Option 2 DISA Cyclic Tone Detection Selects the cyclic tone detection mode. Cyclic tone detection is used to determine the end of a call for a DISA CO-to-CO line conversation established through an analog CO line.
  • Page 768 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Feature Manual References None DISA Cyclic Tone Option—Tone On Maximum Time Specifies the maximum duration of the cyclic tone that will be recognized by the PBX. When the tone sent from the telephone company is shorter than the value set here, the PBX recognizes it as a tone-on. Note that this option can only be set when DISA Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to "Option".

  • Page 769: Timed Reminder Message—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

    7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Programming Manual References 3.1 [1-1] Slot 3.44 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Feature Manual References None DISA Cyclic Tone Option—Repeating Times of ON/OFF for Detection Specifies the number of times the tone pattern (a set of tone-on and tone-off) must be received to establish reception of the cyclic tone.

  • Page 770: Recording Mode

    7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Feature Manual References 17.1.4 Timed Reminder Recording Mode Specifies the sound quality of messages recorded on the ESVM card when using it as an MSG card. Increasing the recording quality reduces the total length of recording time available on the card. To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below: Change this setting.

  • Page 771: 5-3-2] Voice Message-Disa Message

    7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Outgoing messages (OGM) for DISA calls can be specified. A maximum of 64 OGMs can be programmed. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 2.5.7 Tool— Extension List View).
  • Page 772 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message 1 Digit AA Destination (Extension Number)—Dial 0–9 Specifies the destination for each DISA Automated Attendant (AA) number. After listening to an OGM, the caller can be directed to the destination by dialing a 1-digit DISA AA number. Default Not stored.
  • Page 773 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 1.1.6 Automatic Fax Transfer Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 774: 5-3-3] Voice Message-Svm

    7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM 7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM Settings related to the Simplified Voice Message feature can be specified. This feature can be accessed via the MPR card or ESVM card. SVM Card No. 1, 2—Slot Number Indicates the slot position (reference only). Default Slot number Value Range...

  • Page 775: Remote Access

    7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM SVM Card No. 1, 2—Card Name Specifies the name of the card, for programming reference. Default Card No. 1: Card No. 2: Voice Msg 2 Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 776 7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM Default Disable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM Programming Manual References 6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message 6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message Feature Manual References 16.1.9 SVM (Simplified Voice Message) SVM Cyclic Tone Detection Selects the cyclic tone detection mode.
  • Page 777 7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM Feature Manual References 16.1.9 SVM (Simplified Voice Message) SVM Cyclic Tone Option—Tone On Maximum Time Specifies the maximum duration of the cyclic tone that will be recognized by the PBX. When the tone sent from the telephone company is shorter than the value set here, the PBX recognizes it as a tone-on. Note that this option can only be set when SVM Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to "Option".
  • Page 778 7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM Programming Manual References 3.1 [1-1] Slot Feature Manual References 16.1.9 SVM (Simplified Voice Message) SVM Cyclic Tone Option—Repeating Times of ON/OFF for Detection Specifies the number of times the tone pattern (a set of tone-on and tone-off) must be received to establish reception of the cyclic tone.

  • Page 779: 5-4] External Relay

    Settings related to external relays can be programmed. External Relay No. Indicates the number of the external relay (reference only). Default Current external relay number. Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–16 For KX-TDE600: 1–64 Maintenance Console Location 7.6 [5-4] External Relay...
  • Page 780 7.6 [5-4] External Relay Physical Location—Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only). Default Current slot and sub-slot number Value Range Slot and sub-slot number Maintenance Console Location 7.6 [5-4] External Relay Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 5.1.8 External Relay Physical Location—Port Indicates the port number (reference only).
  • Page 781 7.6 [5-4] External Relay Maintenance Console Location 7.6 [5-4] External Relay Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 5.1.8 External Relay Relay Activate Time Specifies the length of time that the relay stays on when activated. Default Value Range 1–7 s Maintenance Console Location 7.6 [5-4] External Relay Programming Manual References...
  • Page 782 7.6 [5-4] External Relay Feature Manual References 3.1.22 COS (Class of Service) 5.1.8 External Relay 9.1.14 Internal Call Block PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 783: 5-5] External Sensor

    To assign destinations for sensor calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting) External Sensor No. Indicates the number of the external sensor (reference only). Default Current external sensor number. Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–16 For KX-TDE600: 1–64 Maintenance Console Location 7.7 [5-5] External Sensor Programming Manual References...
  • Page 784 7.7 [5-5] External Sensor Feature Manual References 5.1.9 External Sensor Physical Location—Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only). Default Current slot and sub-slot number Value Range Slot and sub-slot number Maintenance Console Location 7.7 [5-5] External Sensor Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 5.1.9 External Sensor...

  • Page 785: Tenant No

    5.1.9 External Sensor Tenant No. Specifies the tenant to which the sensor belongs, to determine the Time Table for the sensor. (The tenant number corresponds to the Time Table number.) Default Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 786 7.7 [5-5] External Sensor For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 7.7 [5-5] External Sensor Programming Manual References 4.6 [2-4] Week Table Feature Manual References 5.1.9 External Sensor 17.1.3 Tenant Service PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 787: [6] Feature

    Section 8 [6] Feature Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 788: 6-1] System Speed Dial

    Dialing Table or the additional table depends on the setting of System Speed Dial in 8.6 [6-6] Tenant. Default Basic Memory Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Basic Memory: the standard table Expansion for Tenant 1–8: additional tables For KX-TDE600: Basic Memory: the standard table Expansion for Tenant 1–32: additional tables...

  • Page 789: Co Line Access Number + Telephone Number

    8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 16.1.8 Speed Dialing, System CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number Specifies the telephone number (including the CO Line Access number) or feature number assigned to the System Speed Dialing number. Default Not stored.
  • Page 790 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial Feature Manual References 3.1.3 Caller ID 3.1.14 CLI (Calling Line Identification) Distribution PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 791: 6-2] Hotel

    8.2 [6-2] Hotel 8.2 [6-2] Hotel Various settings related to the hospitality features of the PBX can be set. Main Hotel Operator—Extension 1–4 Specifies the numbers of the extensions designated as hotel operators. Default Extension 1: 101 Value Range 100–699 Maintenance Console Location 8.2 [6-2] Hotel Programming Manual References...

  • Page 792: Smdr For External Hotel Application 1—Timed Reminder (Wake-Up Call)

    8.2 [6-2] Hotel SMDR for External Hotel Application 1—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call) Selects whether Timed Reminder data is output on SMDR. Default No Print Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location 8.2 [6-2] Hotel Programming Manual References 13.1 [11-1] Main Feature Manual References 16.1.4 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) 17.1.4 Timed Reminder...

  • Page 793: 6-3] Verification Code

    8.3 [6-3] Verification Code 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code A verification code is used to override the Toll Restriction (TRS) of the extension in use to make a certain CO line call, or to identify the call for accounting and billing purposes. A maximum of 1000 verification codes can be programmed with other related parameters.
  • Page 794 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code Verification Code PIN Specifies the PIN to be entered when making a CO line call with the verification code. CAUTION There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.
  • Page 795 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code Itemized Billing Code for ARS Specifies the itemized billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying calls made with a verification code for accounting and billing purposes. Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code Programming Manual References...

  • Page 796: 6-4] Second Dial Tone

    8.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone 8.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone A programmed Pause time can be inserted automatically between the Second Dial Tone Waiting code and the following digits. When a programmed Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialed after seizing a CO line, a preprogrammed number of pauses are inserted after the code.

  • Page 797: 6-5] Absent Message

    8.5 [6-5] Absent Message 8.5 [6-5] Absent Message When a display PT user calls an extension, a message is shown on the caller’s telephone display describing the reason for absence. A maximum of 8 Absent Messages can be programmed, and any extension user can select one of them.

  • Page 798: 6-6] Tenant

    8.6 [6-6] Tenant 8.6 [6-6] Tenant A maximum of 8 (KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/32 (KX-TDE600) tenants can share the PBX. Each tenant is composed of specified extension user groups. The PBX offers each tenant its own Time Table and system resources. To assign extensions as operators easily, click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).

  • Page 799: System Speed Dial

    8.6 [6-6] Tenant Programming Manual References 4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM Feature Manual References 17.1.3 Tenant Service 12.1.5 Operator Features ARS Mode Specifies the ARS mode used when making a CO line call. Default Same as System Setting Value Range Off: ARS is disabled.
  • Page 800 8.6 [6-6] Tenant Programming Manual References 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial Feature Manual References 16.1.8 Speed Dialing, System 17.1.3 Tenant Service PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 801: [7] Trs

    Section 9 [7] TRS Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 802: 7-1] Denied Code

    9.1 [7-1] Denied Code 9.1 [7-1] Denied Code Toll Restriction (TRS) prohibits an extension from making certain CO line calls. Each time mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS levels. TRS level 7 provides the maximum restriction (all CO line calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all CO line calls are allowed).

  • Page 803: 7-2] Exception Code

    9.2 [7-2] Exception Code 9.2 [7-2] Exception Code Toll Restriction (TRS) prohibits an extension from making certain CO line calls. Each time mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS levels. TRS level 7 provides the maximum restriction (all CO line calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all CO line calls are allowed).

  • Page 804: 7-3] Special Carrier

    Carrier Access Code is found in the dialed number, TRS will look only at the following digits. A maximum of 20 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 100 (with the KX-TDE600) Special Carrier Access Codes can be programmed. With the KX-TDE600, 20 codes are displayed at a time.

  • Page 805: 7-4] Emergency Dial

    9.4 [7-4] Emergency Dial 9.4 [7-4] Emergency Dial Any extension user can dial the programmed emergency numbers at any time after seizing a CO line. The restrictions imposed on the extension, such as Toll Restriction (TRS), Account Code—Forced mode, and Extension Dial Lock are disregarded.

  • Page 806: 7-5] Miscellaneous

    9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous 9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous Toll Restriction (TRS) prohibits an extension from making certain CO line calls. The following optional settings can be programmed to activate a TRS check, override TRS, or switch between TRS methods. TRS Override by System Speed Dialing Enables an outgoing CO line call to override TRS when the call is made using System Speed Dialing.

  • Page 807: Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits

    9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous Mode when Dial Time-out before TRS Check Selects whether a CO line is disconnected if the TRS check has not been completed when the CO line Inter-digit timer expires. Default Disconnect Value Range Disconnect: The CO line is disconnected as soon as the timer expires. Keep: The TRS check is performed when the timer expires.
  • Page 808 9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction) 5.1.1 EFA (External Feature Access) TRS Table Mode for Level N (N=2_6) Selects the method of TRS to be used for restricting calls. The level of TRS is determined by the telephone codes set in the Denied Code Tables and Exception Code Tables.

  • Page 809: 10 [8] Ars

    Section 10 [8] ARS Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 810: 8-1] System Setting

    10.1 [8-1] System Setting 10.1 [8-1] System Setting Automatic Route Selection (ARS) automatically selects the appropriate carrier at the time a CO line call is made, according to the programmed settings. The user-dialed number will be checked and modified in order to connect it to the appropriate carrier.
  • Page 811 10.1 [8-1] System Setting Feature Manual References 1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection) Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 812: 8-2] Leading Number

    10.2 [8-2] Leading Number 10.2 [8-2] Leading Number Specifies the area codes and/or telephone numbers as leading numbers that will be routed by the ARS feature. A maximum of 1000 different leading numbers can be programmed, and each leading number can select a Routing Plan Table number, which determines the ARS procedure.
  • Page 813 Feature Manual References 1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection) Routing Plan Number Specifies the Routing Plan Table number used for each leading number. Default Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–16 For KX-TDE600: 1–48 Maintenance Console Location 10.2 [8-2] Leading Number Programming Manual References...

  • Page 814: 8-3] Routing Plan Time

    The start and end times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks are shown for each day of the week. There are 16 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 48 (with the KX-TDE600) Routing Plan Tables, and each Routing Plan Table can have its own time blocks. Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list.

  • Page 815: 8-3] Routing Plan Time-Time Setting

    10.4 [8-3] Routing Plan Time—Time Setting 10.4 [8-3] Routing Plan Time—Time Setting The start times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the selected Routing Plan. Each time block automatically ends when the subsequent block begins. Time-A–D—Setting Enables the setting of the start time for each time block.

  • Page 816: 8-4] Routing Plan Priority

    Default Routing Plan 1–10 Priority 1: [Routing Plan no.] Priority 2–6: None Routing Plan 11–48 Priority 1–6: None Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: None, 1–10 For KX-TDE600: None, 1–48 Maintenance Console Location 10.5 [8-4] Routing Plan Priority Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)

  • Page 817: 8-5] Carrier

    It is possible to specify how user-dialed numbers are modified for connecting to the appropriate carrier. A maximum of 10 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 48 (with the KX-TDE600) different carriers can be programmed to be used with the ARS feature.
  • Page 818 Maintenance Console Location 10.6 [8-5] Carrier Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection) TRG 01–TRG 64 (KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200), or TRG 01–TRG 96 (KX-TDE600) Selects the trunk groups that connect to the carrier. PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...
  • Page 819 Modify Command on the Carrier tab. Authorization Code for Tenant—Tenant 1–Tenant 32 Specifies the Authorization code of each carrier for each tenant. Note For the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200, only up to 8 tenants are available. Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6 [8-5] Carrier...
  • Page 820 10.6 [8-5] Carrier Feature Manual References 1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection) 17.1.3 Tenant Service PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 821: 8-6] Leading Number Exception

    10.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception 10.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception Specifies telephone numbers that will not be connected using the ARS feature. When the user-dialed number includes a leading number exception, the PBX sends the number to a CO line by the Idle Line Access method ARS Mode in 10.1 [8-1] System Setting is "on".

  • Page 822: 8-7] Authorization Code For Trg

    10.6 [8-5] Carrier. 8 trunk groups are displayed on the screen at a time. To display other groups, click the applicable tab. Authorization Code for Trunk Group—TRG 01–TRG 64 (KX-NCP500/ KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200), or TRG 01–TRG 96 (KX-TDE600) Specifies the Authorization code of each carrier for each trunk group.

  • Page 823: 11 [9] Private Network

    Section 11 [9] Private Network Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 824: 9-1] Tie Table

    11.1 [9-1] TIE Table 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost effective communications between company members at different locations. A maximum of 32 TIE Line Routing and Modification Tables can be programmed. It is necessary to make unified tables with all PBXs at different locations in a TIE line network in order to identify the CO line route to be used when an extension makes or receives a TIE line call.
  • Page 825 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table No. 7: 7 No. 8: 8 No. 9: 9 No. 10: 0 No. 11–32: Not stored. Value Range Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES...
  • Page 826 Trunk Group Specifies the trunk group to be used for TIE line calls for each priority. Default No. 1–10: 7 No. 11–32: None Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: None, 1–64 For KX-TDE600: None, 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table...
  • Page 827 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table Maintenance Console Location 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation Key Required) Enables Network Message Waiting information to be sent from the PBX to which the VPS is attached to extensions connected to other PBXs in the network.

  • Page 828: 9-2] Network Data Transmission

    11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission 11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission Settings related to the transmission of extension BLF (Busy Line Field) data or Message Waiting notifications over a network of PBXs can be programmed. Extension BLF data is used to show the status of a monitored extension attached to another PBX on a Network DSS (NDSS) button.
  • Page 829 11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission Programming Manual References 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Networking Data Transfer Feature Manual References 13.1.17 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection) Network Data Transmission for Centralized Operator Feature—Data Transmission ISDN->VoIP Selects whether to re-send BLF data received from an ISDN port through any VoIP ports that are set to transmit BLF data.
  • Page 830 11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission Feature Manual References 13.1.17 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection) Network Data Transmission for Centralized Operator Feature—Data Broadcasting Interval Timer Specifies the frequency of BLF data transmission. The PBX will send data over the network periodically according to the interval specified here.
  • Page 831 11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralized VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Timer Specifies the length of time between repeated re-transmission of network message waiting notifications. Default 30 s Value Range 10–240 s Maintenance Console Location 11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission Programming Manual References 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table—...

  • Page 832: 9-3] Network Operator (Voip)

    Specifies the slot number (with the KX-TDE600, shelf and slot number) of the card used to send extension status data. This setting is only required when using VoIP to transmit data. Default Undefined Value Range For KX-NCP500: Undefined, 1–3, V-1–V-2 For KX-NCP1000: Undefined, 1–4, V-1–V-4 For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Undefined, 1–11, V-1–V-4...
  • Page 833 11.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP) Maintenance Console Location 11.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP) Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 13.1.17 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection) Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 834: 9-4] Ndss Key Table

    11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table 11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table Extensions at up to 7 other PBXs that will be monitored using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) can be registered. A maximum of 250 extensions can be registered. To create an NDSS button to monitor an extension, the extension must be registered here first.
  • Page 835 11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table Feature Manual References 13.1.17 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection) Network PBX ID of Network Extension to be monitored Indicates the Network Data Transmission for Centralized Operator Feature—Network PBX ID of the PBX that the extension is connected to (reference only). Default Not stored.
  • Page 836 11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 837: 10] Co & Incoming Call

    Section 12 [10] CO & Incoming Call Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 838: 10-1] Co Line Settings

    12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings CO lines can be assigned a name, and grouped into a maximum of 64 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/ KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 96 (with the KX-TDE600) trunk groups. For KX-TDE600, all supported cards are displayed in the Select Shelf & Slot list. Select the shelf and slot and card type to program, or select "All"...
  • Page 839 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Feature Manual References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Default Current port number Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None CO Name Specifies the CO line name which is shown on the extension’s display when receiving a call from the CO line.
  • Page 840 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Default Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–64 For KX-TDE600: 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 841: 10-2] Dil Table & Port Settings

    To assign DIL destination numbers, enter directly or click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting). Shelf Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only). Default Current shelf type/number Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Physical, Virtual For KX-TDE600: Shelf number, Virtual Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 842 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Default Current port number Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table &...
  • Page 843 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Feature Manual References 9.1.10 INCOMING CALL FEATURES Trunk Property Indicates the networking type of each CO line (reference only). Default Current networking type Value Range Public, Private(TIE), VPN Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...

  • Page 844: Dil Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

    Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time of day. Default Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References 4.6 [2-4] Week Table...

  • Page 845: Cli For Dil

    CLI distribution can be enabled or disabled for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) on a CO line basis. Shelf Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only). Default Current shelf type/number Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Physical, Virtual For KX-TDE600: Shelf number, Virtual Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings...
  • Page 846 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Feature Manual References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each CO line card (reference only). Default Current slot number Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 847 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Default Current card type Value Range Card type Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 9.1.10 INCOMING CALL FEATURES Trunk Property Indicates the networking type of each CO line (reference only). Default Current networking type Value Range...

  • Page 848: Cli Ring For Dil—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

    Private (TIE), modification parameters for DID number and TIE line call numbers can be programmed. Shelf Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only). Default Current shelf type/number Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Physical, Virtual PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...
  • Page 849 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings For KX-TDE600: Shelf number, Virtual Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each CO line card (reference only). Default Current slot number Value Range...
  • Page 850 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Card Type Indicates the CO line card type (reference only). Default Current card type Value Range Card type Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 851 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Distribution Method Selects the distribution method for incoming CO line calls. The value range of this setting depends on the card type and Trunk Property assigned for each CO line. Default For PRI23 card: DID For IP-GW or V-IPGW card: TIE Value Range DIL: Distribution depends on the CO line through which the calls arrive...
  • Page 852 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings DID/TIE—Additional Dial Specifies the number to be added to the incoming called number in the place of the removed digits for DID distribution or for TIE line service. Default Not stored. Value Range Max.

  • Page 853: 10-3] Did Table

    12.3 [10-3] DID Table 12.3 [10-3] DID Table Incoming CO line calls with DID numbers can be distributed to specific destinations. Each DID number has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night). When CLI distribution is enabled for a DID number, incoming CO line calls with that DID number will be distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the DID destinations) if the caller’s identification number is found in the System Speed Dialing Table, which is used as the Caller ID Table.
  • Page 854 13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time of day. Default Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 12.3 [10-3] DID Table...
  • Page 855 12.3 [10-3] DID Table Programming Manual References 4.6 [2-4] Week Table Feature Manual References 4.1.6 DID (Direct Inward Dialing) VM Trunk Group No. Specifies the number of the VM trunk group sent to the VPS when the DID destination is the floating extension number of a VM (DPT) Group.
  • Page 856 12.3 [10-3] DID Table Feature Manual References 3.1.14 CLI (Calling Line Identification) Distribution 4.1.6 DID (Direct Inward Dialing) PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 857: 10-3] Did Table-Automatic Registration

    12.4 [10-3] DID Table—Automatic Registration 12.4 [10-3] DID Table—Automatic Registration Automatic Registration allows DID numbers and DID destinations in each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series. Beginning Entry Location Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed. Default Value Range 1–1000...
  • Page 858 12.4 [10-3] DID Table—Automatic Registration Number of Registration Specifies the number of locations to be programmed. Default Value Range 1–1000 Maintenance Console Location 12.4 [10-3] DID Table—Automatic Registration Programming Manual References 12.3 [10-3] DID Table Feature Manual References 4.1.6 DID (Direct Inward Dialing) Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the number of the DID destination in each time mode for the first location to be programmed.

  • Page 859: 10-3] Did Table-Name Generate

    12.5 [10-3] DID Table—Name Generate 12.5 [10-3] DID Table—Name Generate Name Generate allows DID names to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series. If a name generated here is longer than 20 characters, the additional characters will be discarded. Beginning Entry Location Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed.
  • Page 860 12.5 [10-3] DID Table—Name Generate No. of Digits to Delete Specifies the number of digits to be deleted from the start of a DID number when using it as part of the DID name. Default Value Range 0–32 Maintenance Console Location 12.5 [10-3] DID Table—Name Generate Programming Manual References 12.3 [10-3] DID Table...
  • Page 861 12.5 [10-3] DID Table—Name Generate Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12.5 [10-3] DID Table—Name Generate Programming Manual References 12.3 [10-3] DID Table Feature Manual References 4.1.6 DID (Direct Inward Dialing) Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 862: 10-4] Miscellaneous

    12.6 [10-4] Miscellaneous 12.6 [10-4] Miscellaneous The Intercept Routing feature can activate when the destination of an incoming call is unavailable, or when there is no destination for the call, to reroute the call to an alternate destination. Intercept—Intercept Routing - DND (Destination sets DND.) Enables the Intercept Routing—DND feature to activate when the original destination is in DND mode.
  • Page 863 12.6 [10-4] Miscellaneous Feature Manual References 9.1.12 Intercept Routing—No Destination Intercept—Intercept Routing for Extension Call Enables the Intercept Routing feature to operate for extension calls. Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 12.6 [10-4] Miscellaneous Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 9.1.12 Intercept Routing—No Destination...
  • Page 864 12.6 [10-4] Miscellaneous PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 865: 11] Maintenance

    Section 13 [11] Maintenance Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 866: 11-1] Main

    13.1 [11-1] Main 13.1 [11-1] Main SMDR Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) automatically records detailed information about incoming and outgoing calls. SMDR Format—Type Selects the format of SMDR output. Default Type A Value Range Type A: 80 digits without call charge information Type B: 80 digits with call charge information Type C: 120 digits Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 867 13.1 [11-1] Main SMDR Format—Page Length (Number of Lines) Specifies the number of lines on a page of output paper. Match the SMDR output to the paper size being used in the printer. Default Value Range 4–99 Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 868 13.1 [11-1] Main Value Range MM-DD-YY, DD-MM-YY, YY-MM-DD, YY-DD-MM Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 16.1.4 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) SMDR Format—Time Format (12H / 24H) Selects whether times are displayed using the 12- or 24-hour format. Default Value Range 12H, 24H...
  • Page 869 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Outgoing CO Call Printout (SMDR) Feature Manual References 16.1.4 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) Print Information—Incoming Call Specifies whether the information relating to incoming CO line calls, such as caller’s identification name and number, is printed.

  • Page 870: Print Information—Error Log

    13.1 [11-1] Main Print Information—Log-in / Log-out Specifies whether the log-in/log-out status is printed. Default No Print Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out 16.1.4 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) Print Information—Hotel Room Status Selects whether check-in and check-out data is output on SMDR.

  • Page 871: Smdr Options

    13.1 [11-1] Main Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 16.1.4 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) 10.1.4 Local Alarm Information SMDR Options Option—ARS Dial Selects the type of the dialed number to be printed for a call with the ARS feature. Default Dial after ARS Modification Value Range...
  • Page 872 13.1 [11-1] Main Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 16.1.4 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) Option—DID Number & Name Selects the printing format of incoming CO line calls with a DID number. Default None Value Range None, Number, Name, Name + Number...
  • Page 873 13.1 [11-1] Main Feature Manual References 11.1.2 MEMORY DIALING FEATURES 16.1.4 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) Option—Condition Code "RC/VR" Specifies whether the time of receiving an incoming CO line call is printed. Default No Print Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References...
  • Page 874 13.1 [11-1] Main Option—Caller ID Modification Specifies whether Caller ID numbers are recorded on SMDR as received (before being modified by the PBX) or after being modified. Default Before Modification Value Range Before Modification, After Modification Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Feature Manual References...
  • Page 875 13.1 [11-1] Main Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 16.1.4 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) LAN—SMDR Password Specifies the password used to output the SMDR data via the LAN. Default PCCSMDR Value Range Max.

  • Page 876: Communication—Baud Rate

    13.1 [11-1] Main Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 16.1.4 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) RS-232C Communication—Baud Rate Specifies the data transmission speed from the PBX to the printer or personal computer. To ensure stable transmission, when changing this setting to 57600 or 115200 bps, set Communication —Flow on this screen to Hardware.

  • Page 877: Communication—Parity Bit

    13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 16.1.4 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) Communication—Parity Bit Selects a parity bit code that indicates what type of parity is used to detect an error in the string of bits composing a character.

  • Page 878: Communication—Stop Bit

    13.1 [11-1] Main Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 16.1.4 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) Communication—Flow Enables the hardware flow control. Default None Value Range None, Hardware Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...
  • Page 879 13.1 [11-1] Main Feature Manual References 16.1.4 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) External Modem Command—Automatic Initialization Specifies the command to automatically initialize an external modem when it is plugged into the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port of the PBX. Default AT&F0Q0E0V1S0=1X0&D0 Value Range Max.

  • Page 880: Local Alarm Display—Extension 1, Extension

    13.1 [11-1] Main Maintenance Local Alarm Display—Extension 1, Extension 2 Specifies the extension numbers of PTs that will be notified by the PBX about local alarms. When the PBX detects a PBX error, the System Alarm button on the PT turns on red. When this button is pressed, the display will show the error number, and the button light will turn off automatically.

  • Page 881: Daily Test Start Time—Minute

    13.1 [11-1] Main Default Value Range 0–23 Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 10.1.4 Local Alarm Information Daily Test Start Time—Minute Specifies the minute of the PBX daily self check start time. Default Value Range 0–59 Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 882 13.1 [11-1] Main Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table— Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation Key Required) 11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission— Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralized VM Feature— Data Re-transmission : Repeat Counter Feature Manual References 13.1.16 Private Network Features—Centralized Voice Mail Error Log for Centralized VM—Network MSW Transmission (Buffer)
  • Page 883 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 16.1.10 Syslog Record Management Syslog—Syslog Server IP Address Specifies the IP address of a syslog server. Default Not stored. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 16.1.10 Syslog Record Management...
  • Page 884 13.1 [11-1] Main Syslog—Minor Selects whether to output minor alarm information to a syslog server. Default Enable Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 16.1.10 Syslog Record Management Remote Remote—Analog Remote (Modem) Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number for analog remote maintenance.
  • Page 885 13.1 [11-1] Main Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 13.1.6 PC Programming Remote—Password Lock Counter for Remote Programming Specifies the number of successive incorrect password entries allowed before remote access is locked. Default None Value Range...
  • Page 886 13.1 [11-1] Main Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 14.1.2 Quick Setup Password Passwords authorize the user to program the extension and the PBX by a PT or a personal computer. System Password - PT Programming—Prog ** : User Level Specifies the user level system password to authorize the PT user to access only the permitted system programming.
  • Page 887 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 13.1.32 PT Programming Manager Password - PT Programming—Prog *1 Specifies the manager password to authorize the PT user to access manager programming. Default 1234 Value Range 4–10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References...
  • Page 888 13.1 [11-1] Main System Password - PC Programming—Administrator Level Specifies the system password used to access Maintenance Console at Administrator Level. This password can only be set in Interactive mode. Default 1234 Value Range 4–10 characters Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References...

  • Page 889: 11-2] Pt Programming Access

    13.2 [11-2] PT Programming Access 13.2 [11-2] PT Programming Access The programming items accessible at User and Administrator level can be specified. 100 programming item numbers are displayed at a time. To display other sets of numbers, click the applicable tab.

  • Page 890: 11-3] Power Failure Transfer

    Specifies the position of the CO line card to be used. Default None Value Range For KX-NCP500: None, Small Free Slot 1, Small Free Slot 2, Small Free Slot 3 For KX-NCP1000: None, Small Free Slot 1, Small Free Slot 2, Small Free Slot 3, Small Free Slot 4 For KX-TDE series: None, 1–11...
  • Page 891 13.3 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer For KX-NCP1000: None, Small Free Slot 1, Small Free Slot 2, Small Free Slot 3, Small Free Slot 4 For KX-TDE series: None, 1–11 Maintenance Console Location 13.3 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 13.1.11 Power Failure Transfer...

  • Page 892: 11-4-1] Snmp-System Setting

    13.4 [11-4-1] SNMP—System Setting 13.4 [11-4-1] SNMP—System Setting Using SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol), it is possible for a PC assigned as an SNMP manager to manage and receive PBX system status information, such as alarm information and general system activity. The related PBX system settings can be programmed.
  • Page 893 13.4 [11-4-1] SNMP—System Setting MIB - SysContact Specifies the name and contact information of the system administrator. Default Not stored. Value Range Max. 255 characters Maintenance Console Location 13.4 [11-4-1] SNMP—System Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 16.1.5 SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) System Monitor MIB - SysName Specifies an administrative name for the system.
  • Page 894 13.4 [11-4-1] SNMP—System Setting Maintenance Console Location 13.4 [11-4-1] SNMP—System Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 16.1.5 SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) System Monitor PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 895: 11-4-2] Snmp-Manager

    13.5 [11-4-2] SNMP—Manager 13.5 [11-4-2] SNMP—Manager It is possible to assign up to two PCs as SNMP managers. The settings related to SNMP manager activity can be programmed for each SNMP manager, indicated as No.1 and No.2 on the screen. This option is only available at Installer level.
  • Page 896 13.5 [11-4-2] SNMP—Manager TRAP Port Number (Send) Specifies a port number used to send TRAP to an SNMP manager. Default Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 13.5 [11-4-2] SNMP—Manager Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 16.1.5 SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) System Monitor TRAP Cold Start Selects whether the PBX sends Cold Start TRAP to an SNMP manager or not.
  • Page 897 13.5 [11-4-2] SNMP—Manager Maintenance Console Location 13.5 [11-4-2] SNMP—Manager Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References 16.1.5 SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) System Monitor TRAP Alarm - Major Selects whether the PBX sends Major Alarm TRAP to an SNMP manager or not. Default Enable Value Range...
  • Page 898 13.5 [11-4-2] SNMP—Manager Feature Manual References 16.1.5 SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) System Monitor PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 899: 11-5] Air Synchronization

    1–32 Maintenance Console Location 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronization Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Slot Type (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/Shelf (for KX-TDE600) Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only). Default Current shelf type/number Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 900 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronization Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Physical, Virtual For KX-TDE600: Shelf number, Virtual Maintenance Console Location 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronization Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only). Default Current slot number...
  • Page 901 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronization Maintenance Console Location 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronization Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None CS Name Indicates the name of the CS (reference only). Default Not applicable. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronization Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 902 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronization Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Status Indicates whether a certain CS is registered (reference only). Default Not applicable. Value Range -, Registered Maintenance Console Location 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronization Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None CS Class...
  • Page 903 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronization Primary CS—Index Specifies the number of the primary CS. Default Not applicable. Value Range 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronization Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Primary CS—Slot Indicates the slot position of the primary CS (reference only). Default Current slot number Value Range...
  • Page 904 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronization Maintenance Console Location 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronization Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Primary CS—CS Name Indicates the name of the primary CS (reference only). Default Not applicable. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronization Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 905 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronization Feature Manual References None Secondary CS—Slot Indicates the slot position of the secondary CS (reference only). Default Current slot number Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronization Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None Secondary CS—Port Indicates the port number of the secondary CS (reference only).
  • Page 906 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronization Default Not applicable. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronization Programming Manual References None Feature Manual References None PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 907: Appendix

    Section 14 Appendix Document Version 2011-10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 908: Revision History

    14.1.2 KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 PBMPR Software File Version 2.02xx 14.1 Revision History 14.1.1 KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 PBMPR Software File Version 1.01xx New Contents • 3.1 [1-1] Slot To access IP-PT port properties Changed Contents • 1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console • 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension •...
  • Page 909 • 3.1 [1-1] Slot • 3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key • 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/ IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) • 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern • 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension •...

  • Page 910: Kx-Ncp500/Kx-Ncp1000 Pbmpr Software File Version 4.1Xxx

    5.26 [3-10] Conference Group Changed Contents • 3.1 [1-1] Slot Maximum number of cards • 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/ IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600)—VoIP-DSP Option— IP Extension Count of BGM • 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings •...

  • Page 911: Kx-Ncp500/Kx-Ncp1000 Pbmpr Software File Version 4.2Xxx

    14.1.5 KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 PBMPR Software File Version 5.0xxx • 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings— FWD / DND Reference • 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console PDF Output • 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronization 14.1.4 KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 PBMPR Software File Version 4.2xxx New Contents • 3.48 [1-3] Option—...

  • Page 912: Kx-Tde100/Kx-Tde200 Pmmpr Software File Version 2.0Xxx

    14.1.6 KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 2.0xxx • 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings— FWD / DND Reference – FWD Availability for FWD/DND Key (CO) – DND Availability for FWD/DND Key (CO) – FWD Availability for FWD/DND Key (Extension) – DND Availability for FWD/DND Key (Extension) •...

  • Page 913: Kx-Tde100/Kx-Tde200 Pmmpr Software File Version 2.01Xx

    • 2.2.5 Program launcher—Connect—LAN • 3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key • 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/ IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) • 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension • 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only) •...
  • Page 914 2.6.7 Utility—Message File Transfer PBX to PC • 2.6.14 Utility—IP Extension Statistical Information • 2.6.15 Utility—CS Information • 2.6.21 Utility—Card Software Timed Update • 3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key • 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/ IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) PC Programming Manual Document Version 2011-10...

  • Page 915: Kx-Tde100/Kx-Tde200 Pmmpr Software File Version 4.1Xxx

    14.1.9 KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 4.1xxx • 3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property • 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings • 3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP • 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension •...

  • Page 916: Kx-Tde100/Kx-Tde200 Pmmpr Software File Version 4.2Xxx

    14.1.11 KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 5.0xxx Changed Contents • 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/ IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600)—VoIP-DSP Option— IP Extension Count of BGM • 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Assistant— Transfer to busy Extension w/o BSS Operation •...
  • Page 917 14.1.11 KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 5.0xxx • 4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings— FSK Transmission Level (for MCSLC Card) • 5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous— Options—Call Log to ICD Group when Overflow Destination Answered • 5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings— Overflow to Mailbox for Call to ICD Group •...

  • Page 918: Kx-Tde600 Pgmpr Software File Version 3.0Xxx

    14.1.12 KX-TDE600 PGMPR Software File Version 3.0xxx 14.1.12 KX-TDE600 PGMPR Software File Version 3.0xxx New Contents • 1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console PBX Web Manager • 2.6.17 Utility—CS Status Monitor • 2.6.19 Utility—File Transfer FTP to IP Equipment—IP-CS/NT400 •...

  • Page 919: Kx-Tde600 Pgmpr Software File Version 4.1Xxx

    2.6.15 Utility—CS Information • 2.6.21 Utility—Card Software Timed Update • 3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key • 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/ IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) • 3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property • 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings •...

  • Page 920: Kx-Tde600 Pgmpr Software File Version 4.2Xxx

    5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Centralized VM Unit Setting • 5.26 [3-10] Conference Group Changed Contents • 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/ IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600)—VoIP-DSP Option— IP Extension Count of BGM • 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Assistant—...

  • Page 921: Kx-Tde600 Pgmpr Software File Version 5.0Xxx

    14.1.15 KX-TDE600 PGMPR Software File Version 5.0xxx → Incoming Call Log—Call Pickup • 6.17 [4-2-6] Portable Station—Single CO Appearance 14.1.15 KX-TDE600 PGMPR Software File Version 5.0xxx New Contents • 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— SIP Refer (Blind) • 4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 1— PT Operation—One-touch Busy Override by SCO key •...
  • Page 922 14.1.15 KX-TDE600 PGMPR Software File Version 5.0xxx • 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Overflow Queuing Busy— Queuing Busy—Queue Call Capacity • 5.26 [3-10] Conference Group— Ability to Talk • 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—ISDN CLIP— ARS Itemized Code/2nd CLIP (10 digits) •...

  • Page 923: Feature Programming References

    14.2 Feature Programming References 14.2 Feature Programming References Absent Message • 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Absent Message Set / Cancel • 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Absent Message • 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Absent Message • 8.5 [6-5] Absent Message Feature Manual References 1.1.1 Absent Message Account Code Entry...
  • Page 924 14.2 Feature Programming References Automatic Extension Release • 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone – Dial—Extension First Digit – Dial—Extension Inter-digit – Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Handset – Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free Feature Manual References 1.1.5 Automatic Extension Release Automatic Time Adjustment...
  • Page 925 14.2 Feature Programming References – Extension Caller ID – Incoming Call Wait Timer for Extension Caller ID • 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial • 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Feature Manual References 3.1.3 Caller ID Call Hold • 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone –...

  • Page 926: Call Park

    14.2 Feature Programming References Call Monitor • 4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Call Monitor • 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive— Call Monitor • 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings – Option 2— Data Mode – Option 3— Executive Override Deny •...

  • Page 927: Call Transfer

    14.2 Feature Programming References Feature Manual References 3.1.8 Call Pickup Call Transfer • 4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM— BGM and Music on Hold—Sound on Transfer • 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Recall—Transfer Recall • 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings –...
  • Page 928 14.2 Feature Programming References – Option 4— Call Waiting Tone Type • 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings – Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call – Option 2— Automatic C. Waiting – Option 4— Call Waiting Tone Type Feature Manual References 3.1.12 Call Waiting Tone CLI (Calling Line Identification) Distribution •...
  • Page 929 14.2 Feature Programming References – ISDN CLIP— COLR • 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type • 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console— Type Feature Manual References 3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation) CO Line Access • 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port— Connection •...
  • Page 930 14.2 Feature Programming References Feature Manual References 3.1.17 CO Line Call Limitation Communication Assistant (CA) • 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/ IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) • 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CA • 4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 6 (CTI) –...
  • Page 931 CPC Signal Detection (LCO/GCO)—Outgoing, Incoming Feature Manual References 3.1.23 CPC (Calling Party Control) Signal Detection CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) • 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/ IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) • 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Dial Information (CTI) •...
  • Page 932 14.2 Feature Programming References Data Line Security • 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Data Line Security Set / Cancel • 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2— Data Mode Feature Manual References 4.1.1 Data Line Security Dial Mode Selection • 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port –...
  • Page 933 14.2 Feature Programming References Feature Manual References 4.1.5 Dial Tone Transfer DHCP • 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/ IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600)— DHCP Client Feature Manual References 4.1.2 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Assignment DID (Direct Inward Dialing) •...
  • Page 934 14.2 Feature Programming References • 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Accept the Call from DISA • 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Tone Detection – DISA Tone Detection—Silence – DISA Tone Detection—Continuous – DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic • 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination—...
  • Page 935 14.2 Feature Programming References Feature Manual References 4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb) Door Open • 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— Doorphone—Open Duration • 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Door Open • 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Door Unlock Feature Manual References 4.1.11 Door Open...
  • Page 936 14.2 Feature Programming References Feature Manual References 5.1.2 Emergency Call Executive Busy Override • 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Executive Override Deny Set / Cancel • 4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Executive Busy Override • 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive –...

  • Page 937: External Relay

    14.2 Feature Programming References Feature Manual References 5.1.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number) Extension Port Configuration • 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port • 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console— Pair Extension Feature Manual References 5.1.7 Extension Port Configuration External Relay •...
  • Page 938 14.2 Feature Programming References Feature Manual References 6.1.2 Flash/Recall/Terminate Flexible Buttons • 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— PT Display—PT Last Display Duration in Idle Mode • 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button • 6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy •...
  • Page 939 14.2 Feature Programming References – CO & SMDR— Call Forward to CO – Manager— Group Forward Set – Optional Device & Other Extensions— Remote Operation by Other Extension • 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main – CO-CO Duration Time (*60s) – Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s) •...
  • Page 940 14.2 Feature Programming References Group Features • Section 5 [3] Group Feature Manual References 7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES Hands-free Answerback • 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free • 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Assistant— Automatic Answer (Caller) •...

  • Page 941: Icd Group Features—Group Call Distribution

    14.2 Feature Programming References Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) • 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Host PBX Access Code • 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—ARS Dial Feature Manual References 8.1.5 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) Hot Line •...
  • Page 942 14.2 Feature Programming References – Miscellaneous— Maximum No. of Busy Extension • 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List— Delayed Ring • 5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous – Options—Wrap-up Timer based on – Options—Longest Idle Distribution (Activation Key Required) •...
  • Page 943 14.2 Feature Programming References – Floating Extension Number – Distribution Method • 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List – Extension Number – Delayed Ring • 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Manual References 9.1.4 ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations ICD Group Features—Overflow •...
  • Page 944 14.2 Feature Programming References ICD Group Features—Supervisory • 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Incoming Call Queue Monitor • 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous— Supervisor Extension Number Feature Manual References 9.1.7 ICD Group Features—Supervisory ICD Group Features—VIP Call • 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous— VIP Call Mode Feature Manual References 9.1.8 ICD Group Features—VIP Call...
  • Page 945 14.2 Feature Programming References Feature Manual References 9.1.11 Intercept Routing Intercept Routing—No Destination • 4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM— PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night • 12.6 [10-4] Miscellaneous— Intercept—Routing to Operator - No Destination (Destination is not programmed.) Feature Manual References 9.1.12 Intercept Routing—No Destination Intercom Call •...

  • Page 946: Led Indication

    14.2 Feature Programming References – Main— Extension Number – Option 7— ISDN Bearer • 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— ISDN Bearer • 5.5 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan—Auto Assign Feature Manual References 9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) •...
  • Page 947 14.2 Feature Programming References Feature Manual References 10.1.3 Line Preference—Outgoing Local Alarm Information • 2.6.7 Utility—Message File Transfer PBX to PC • 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type • 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type • 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console— Type •...

  • Page 948: Music On Hold

    14.2 Feature Programming References Music on Hold • 4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM – BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM (for KX-NCP series)/Music Source of BGM2 (for KX-TDE series) – BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold • 4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH –...
  • Page 949 14.2 Feature Programming References One-touch Dialing • 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6— Flexible Button Programming Mode • 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button – Type – Dial (for One-touch) • 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 6— Flexible Button Programming Mode •...
  • Page 950 14.2 Feature Programming References Paralleled Telephone • 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type— APT/SLT Parallel Ring • 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port – XDP Mode – Parallel Telephone Ringing • 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Parallel Telephone (Ring) Mode Set / Cancel Feature Manual References 13.1.2 Paralleled Telephone Password Security...

  • Page 951: Power Failure Transfer

    14.2 Feature Programming References Feature Manual References 13.1.6 PC Programming PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension • 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—PDN/SDN • 4.18 [2-9] System Options – Option 4— System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD – Option 6 (CTI)—...
  • Page 952 14.2 Feature Programming References Feature Manual References 13.1.13 Printing Message Privacy Release • 4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 1— PT Operation—Privacy Release by SCO key • 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type • 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type • 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console— Type Feature Manual References 13.1.14 Privacy Release...
  • Page 953 14.2 Feature Programming References – Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralized VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Timer • 13.1 [11-1] Main—Maintenance – Error Log for Centralized VM—Network MSW Transmission (Counter) – Error Log for Centralized VM—Network MSW Transmission (Buffer) Feature Manual References 13.1.16 Private Network Features—Centralized Voice Mail Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection) •...
  • Page 954 14.2 Feature Programming References Private Network Features—QSIG • 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, E911 • 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features – COLR Set / Cancel – CLIR Set / Cancel •...
  • Page 955 14.2 Feature Programming References • 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main – Extension Number – Extension Name Feature Manual References 13.1.21 Private Network Features—QSIG—CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber) Private Network Features—QSIG—CT (Call Transfer) • 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, E911 •...
  • Page 956 14.2 Feature Programming References Feature Manual References 13.1.28 PS—CO Status Display (KX-WT125/KX-WT126 only) PS—Directory • 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Name • 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Name • 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial – Name – CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number Feature Manual References 13.1.29 PS—Directory PS—Ring Group...
  • Page 957 14.2 Feature Programming References Redial, Last Number • 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone – Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter – Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration – Automatic Redial—Analog CO Mute / Busy Detection Timer • 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Redial •...
  • Page 958 14.2 Feature Programming References SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension • 3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension • 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port • 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port—Connection Command Feature Manual References 16.1.5 SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) System Monitor SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) •...

  • Page 959: T1 Line Service

    14.2 Feature Programming References – Personal Speed Dialing - Programming • 6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial Feature Manual References 16.1.7 Speed Dialing, Personal Speed Dialing—System • 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— System Speed Dialing / Personal Speed Dialing • 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level for System Speed Dialing •...
  • Page 960 14.2 Feature Programming References Feature Manual References 17.1.1 T1 Line Service TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station) • 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— TAFAS Answer • 4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH – Paging—EPG (External Pager) (for KX-NCP series)/EPG 1 (External Pager 1) (for KX-TDE series) –...
  • Page 961 14.2 Feature Programming References • 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System— Timed Reminder Message—Day, Lunch, Break, Night • 8.2 [6-2] Hotel—Main— SMDR for External Hotel Application 1—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call) Feature Manual References 17.1.4 Timed Reminder Time Service • 4.6 [2-4] Week Table •...

  • Page 962: Upgrading The Software

    14.2 Feature Programming References • 9.2 [7-2] Exception Code • 9.3 [7-3] Special Carrier • 9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous Feature Manual References 17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction) Upgrading the Software • 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card) Feature Manual References 18.1.1 Upgrading the Software Verification Code Entry •...
  • Page 963 14.2 Feature Programming References • 5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings Feature Manual References 19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration • 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Recall—Transfer Recall • 5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings •...
  • Page 964 14.2 Feature Programming References • 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous— Programmed Mailbox • 5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings • 5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings • 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Programmed Mailbox No. • 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button –...
  • Page 965 14.2 Feature Programming References • 4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 5— Whisper OHCA—for SLT / APT / KX-T72xx Feature Manual References 20.1.4 Whisper OHCA Wireless XDP Parallel Mode • 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port— DPT Type—Type • 3.47 [1-2] Portable Station—PS Registration and De-registration •...
  • Page 966 Copyright: This material is copyrighted by Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd., and may be reproduced for internal use only. All other reproduction, in whole or in part, is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd. © Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd. 2010...

This manual is also suitable for:

Kx-tde200Kx-tde100Kx-ncp1000Kx-tde600

Table of Contents